Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . Adding Project Levels . . Creating a Column Grid . Adding Beams . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77

v

Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

vi | Contents

Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. 263 . 265 . 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411

Contents | vii

Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 412 . 415 . 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525

viii | Contents

Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 525 . 536 . 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665

Contents | ix

Working with Detail Groups . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 668 . 668 . 671 . 674 . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803

x | Contents

Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 803 . 805 . 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

quantities.rte. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. and click Open. If the length of the elevation is changed. schedules. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. 12 Select DefaultMetric. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. the parameter is one of association or connection. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. As you work in drawing and schedule views. you will use the default template. the door retains this relationship to the partition. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. and customize the project as necessary. drawing sheets. click Training Files. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. 2D and 3D view. If you move the partition. the hierarchy of elements. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. review the Revit Architecture templates. and plans. drawings. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. 13 Click OK. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. In the Revit Architecture model. In this case. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. In this case. the floor or roof remains connected. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. how to navigate the user interface. and phases when you need it. hence. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. You learn the terminology. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. every drawing sheet. sections. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. For most tutorial projects. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. and schedules required for a building project. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. and residential. construction. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. the operation of the software is parametric. and open Metric\Templates. scope.

without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. doors. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. dimensions. windows. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. If you can draw. filled regions. and roofs are model elements. windows. tags. levels. tags. and reference planes are datum elements. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. For example. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. walls and roofs are hosts. Examples include detail lines. dimensions. doors. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Datum elements help to define project context. walls. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. grids. Understanding the Basics | 7 . They help to describe or document the model. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. and cabinets are model components. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. and 2D detail components. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. For example. For example. and keynotes are annotation elements. For example. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. For example. They display in relevant views of the model. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. For example. programming is not required.When you change something.

you can explicitly control them. and types. and ceilings. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. or bottom of foundation. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. views of the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. such as roofs. you must be in a section or elevation view. floors. Often. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. for example. schedules. In other cases. elevation views. Most often. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Project: In Revit Architecture. and drawings of the design. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . from geometry to construction data. top of wall. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. The project file contains all information for the building design. By using a single project file. section views. families. first floor. To place levels. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. However. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. and so forth). industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views.In Revit Architecture. for example. This information includes components used to design the model. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories.

A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. and levels. ceilings. For example. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. floors. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. making it easy to understand what each button represents. However. A type can be a specific size of a family. For example. roofs.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. In the following illustration. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. System families can be transferred between projects. the user interface is labeled. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. identical use. categories of model elements include walls and beams. and similar graphical representation. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). dimensions. specifically its clear user interface. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. System families include walls. A type can also be a style. In the steps that follow. For example. such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door.

By default. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. This creates a new project based on the default template. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. click (New).Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. In addition. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. and View.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. you type the required key combination to perform the command. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. which are listed on the menu. For example. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. Edit. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. While working in the drawing area. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. Navigating the User Interface | 11 .

select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. For example. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. 9 In the Type Selector. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. when you add a door. When you select the Door tool. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. On the left side of the Options Bar. a door type is specified. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category.

immediately below the Type Selector. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. The Show Design Bars dialog displays. containing buttons grouped by function. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . In the drawing area. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model.

TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. The respective commands display on the Design Bar. In the Project Browser. select Views (all).11 Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. click the tab in the Design Bar.

families. and group name. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. 3D). ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. schedules. and rename views. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . windows). scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. To open a view. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. and groups. reports. elevations. delete. families. double-click its name. sheets. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. walls. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. The browser is dockable. family category (doors.

click Cancel. In this case. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. Do not click. In the bottom left corner of the window. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. click Wall. After creating a browser organization scheme." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. The cursor displays as a pencil.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets.

or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. Toolbar: From the toolbar. When you place the cursor over an element. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. click Modify to end the Wall command. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. Tooltips: To see tooltips. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. If no Help button displays. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5. click on the Standard toolbar. press F1 for help. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. press F1 for context-sensitive help. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. You can also press SHIFT+F1. You can use this tri-pane. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. In addition. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. After you are familiar with these tasks. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. in conjunction with tooltips. Click the Help button.18 On the Design Bar. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. 20 Press TAB. There are several tools that help you find information. It highlights when the cursor is over it. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. The status bar also provides information. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . In the status bar. regarding selected elements in a view. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). Windows: From any window. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. find a keyword on the Index tab.

In the drawing area. the view zooms out from the building model. In the following steps. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). and open Metric\m_Cohouse. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. For example. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. There are several ways to access zoom options.rvt. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. click Training Files. 5 On the View toolbar.

this is referred to as a crossing selection. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. To modify or add snap increments. . SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 10 To display SteeringWheels. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 7 Click in the drawing area.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. When you release the mouse button. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . 6 Click Zoom To Fit. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. the view zooms in on the selected area. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. As you move the mouse. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. on the View toolbar.

14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. moving the wheel to the desired location.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. Cnst. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. referred to as shape handles. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. expand Views (all). Small blue dots. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. and select the wall. and then using the Zoom tool again. and click the SteeringWheels tab. called drag controls. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. click Settings menu ➤ Options. bottoms. and double-click 2nd Flr. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. display along the ends. as shown. 17 Type ZR. 15 To exit the wheel. Similar controls. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. These are the drag controls. press ESC. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. When drawing or modifying a building model. and click Help. expand Floor Plans. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . To define settings for SteeringWheels. For more information about SteeringWheels. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan.

After selecting the element to move. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. as shown. require 2 clicks to complete the command. and click again to specify the ending position. to lengthen the wall. In this case. and on the Tools toolbar. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. for example. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. 23 Click next to the lower wall. click (Move).18 Click and drag the left control. you want to move the table closer to the wall. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. Some commands. The table moves down. click to specify the starting position. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . such as Move and Copy. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table.

click Lines. 24 Select the plant. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Move. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). In this example. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. on the Standard toolbar. and click again to end it. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. select the second item in the list. 26 On the Undo menu. and drag it on top of the table. such as the Lines command. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Some commands. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. click the Undo command. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. or press CTRL+Z.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location.

Press ESC twice. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 . click Modify. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command.29 To end the command. On the Design Bar. 30 Close the file without saving your changes.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. this tutorial uses imperial units only. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. When you have finished these tutorials. illustrating how building components work together. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. 27 . you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. detail. but for training purposes. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. In Revit Architecture. or referenced as a drafting view. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. Use detail components to define an assembly.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. In this tutorial. and annotate building assemblies. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement.

■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. If necessary. click Drafting View.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. enter Window Head Detail. for Name. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Drafting View dialog. and click OK. click Training Files. you will create a drafting view.rvt. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. scroll until the folder is displayed. create a reference callout. 3 In the Scale list. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and reference a drafting view. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. import a DWG detail.

Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. 10 In the drawing area. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. located directly to the left of the drawing area. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. The drawing area is still blank.In the Project Browser. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 9 Type ZR. and click Open. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. 6 In the Colors field list. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim.dwg. click Training Files. The model zooms out. displaying the extents of the detail. select Black and White. as shown.). NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 .

click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. to activate the view selection list.The view displays to the specified area. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click Callout. 13 Click Reference other view. 14 In the drawing area. and in the Scale list. 12 On the Options Bar. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. in the Type Selector. select Detail View: Detail.

rvt. 2 On the Options Bar. select Callout. select Detail View: Detail. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. adjust the detail view display settings. in the Type Selector. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.The reference callout is created. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you will create a detail view defined by a callout. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. 3 In the drawing area. c_express_workshop_details_start. double-click the reference callout tag head. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. and in the Scale list. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise.

under Detail Views(Detail). double-click Wall Base 1. click Modify to clear the selection. 5 In the Rename View dialog. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. enter Wall Base 1. 8 On the Design Bar. and click Rename. select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. 6 In the drawing area. under Detail Views (Detail).The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. and click OK. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 4 Right-click Detail 0. for Name. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser.

10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region. This is the view crop region. bordered by a solid line.The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions. Model-Based Detailing | 33 .

and click View Properties. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 On the View Control Bar. right-click. click (Hide Crop Region). and click OK. 16 Click OK. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 14 In the drawing area.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. under Graphics. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. select As Underlay. for Display Model.

select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. on the Options Bar. Stud. If the crop region is enlarged. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. 20 In the drawing area. By grouping detail components. 19 In the Type Selector. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. click Detail Components. typical details can easily be placed.Brick on Mtl. type 1' 6''. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. Directly above the drawing area. 17 On the View Control Bar. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER.

Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. click Modify to end the command. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. add the following detail components as shown. expand Groups ➤ Detail.22 Press ESC twice to end the command. 23 Using the same method. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . as shown. 25 In the Project Browser. and click Create Instance.

■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation. 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group.28 Press ESC to end the command. Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 .4" Slab detail. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously.

and verify that Horizontal. or instructions within a construction documentation package. and format keynote styles. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. and under Keynote Table. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. for Full Path. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. In the next exercise. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. click Keynote ➤ Element. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .txt. For more information about customizing a keynote database. click Browse. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. click Training Files. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and Free End are selected. Leader. map keynotes by material. consistent means of identifying building assembly components. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail.rvt. You can customize this list. c_express_workshop_details_start. in the type selector. special notes.

place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard .3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. If no value has been specified. 7 Click to place the leader arm. a question mark displays. Keynoting | 39 . Either move the text inside. 8 Click to place the tag. If you would like to complete keynoting the detail. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. or increase the size of the annotation crop region.5 In the drawing area. 9 Press ESC to end the command.

Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. 15 Select 07 21 00. 16 In the drawing area. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 13 Click to place the tag. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. and click OK. click Keynote ➤ Material. 12 Click to place the leader arm. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation. You will now change all keynotes to keys only.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation.

The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values.All items within the selection display in red. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . 17 On the Options Bar. and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. Creating Details with Revit Architecture. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. Click Check None. Only the keynotes remain selected. 19 In the Type Selector.Boxed. You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). legends. Select Keynote Tags. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . Click OK.

In this exercise. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. In this lesson. and modify and update the project sheet title block. but for training purposes. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Add labels to a title block. you will create a sheet. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. Update drawing sheet and project information. update the project information element properties. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. Place views on drawing sheets. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. this tutorial uses imperial units only.

or in the element properties of the title block. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. If necessary. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. scroll until the folder is displayed. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. 3 Click OK. In the Project Browser. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.rvt. In Revit Architecture. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). and the title block is displayed in the drawing area.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

To zoom in and out. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . enter Sections/Details. To pan. 6 In the Title Block. click Modify to clear the selection. 5 In the drawing area. Then. under Sheets(all). double-click Checker. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. roll the wheel. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. Smith and press ENTER. you can enter ZE to zoom out. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. For Name. hold down the wheel and drag.Unnamed. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. 8 On the Design Bar. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. In this tutorial. enter A602.4 Type ZR. 7 Enter K. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. right-click A602 . 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. Click OK. 9 In the Project Browser. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. and click Rename.

20 Click and type Project Status. 17 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Options Bar. 13 Click OK. enter Design Development. 18 On the Options Bar. select the title block. Smith. For Project Name. For Project Status. 16 Type ZR. enter Freighthouse Flats. in the Type Selector. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. For Client Name. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. select Text : 1/8''. The Family Editor opens. (Left) is selected. enter J. enter 4/10/2008. click Text.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. Project Sheet Layout | 45 .

in the Type Selector. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. and verify that (Top) are selected. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. click Label. as shown. 29 On the Design Bar. under Category Parameters. add Project Issue Date parameter. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . as shown.21 On the Design Bar. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. click (Load into Project). and click. click Modify to exit the command. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. and click OK. 23 On the Design Bar. to add 28 Using the same method. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. 22 Using the same method. select Label : 3/16''.

and under Keynote Table. representing the view or schedule. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. click Training Files.30 In the Reload Family dialog. for Full Path. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. In this exercise. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. click Browse.Project. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. to a drawing sheet. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Name. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project.txt. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. and click Yes. enter Keynote Legend . a viewport displays. Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. select Override parameter values of existing types. you will create. place and modify a keynote legend. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . Next you will create. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet.

5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. and click OK. Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text.Sections/Details. clear Show Headers. as shown. 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information.Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. and drag Keynote Legend . The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. under Text. on the Appearance tab. expand Legends. double-click A601 . under Sheets (all). 8 In the Project Browser.

11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet. The keynote legend is visible. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project.9 Press ESC to clear the selection. Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR. 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 . and zoom in on the Keynote Legend . 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection.Project as shown.

15 In the Project Browser. at the bottom of the Filter tab. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. enter Keynote Legend . under Legends. right-click Keynote Legend .14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. expand Detail Views (Detail).Project. select Filter by sheet. as shown. not keynotes. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. click Edit. and click Properties. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. The Keynote Legend is now blank. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. for View Name.Sheet. for Filter. and click OK. 19 Click OK twice.

Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet.The keynote legend is automatically updated. you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise.Title Sheet 1. double-click A0 . The view title with line displays below the viewport. as shown. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 2 In the Project Browser. The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. under Sheets (all). and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. The view remains selected. Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. and then add and update a Drawing list.

You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. 3 In the Type Selector. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. or omit view titles from sheets. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . define the information to include in a view title. Press ESC to clear the selection. The drawing list remains selected. as shown. You can specify text attributes for view titles. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. and zoom in on the drawing list. 5 In the Project Browser. expand Schedules/Quantities. 6 Type ZR. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. Revit Architecture displays a view title. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. by default. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture.When you place a view on a sheet. As part of a construction document set.

and click OK. while pressing SHIFT.Ceiling Plans.Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). under Identity Data. including only sheets that contain views. right-click the selected sheets.Sections/Details and select A801 . select A602 . clear Appears In Drawing List. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. and click Properties. The drawing list display is updated. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. 57 . you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. a central service core. As you develop the building design. For example. a curtain wall. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. If the grid moves. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. it is good practice to test the constraints. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. the wall or column will move with it.

2 In the New Project dialog. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. For this project. and click Browse. construction. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. under Projects. 5 Click OK. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. East. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. In practice. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. levels. and customize the project as necessary.rte. and settings. 3 Under Template file. select Project. West. such as a door or window. you design inside the elevation markers. but contains no geometry. The project is stored as a single file. you use a template that is provided with the software. South. with an RVT extension. subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. you will use the default template. You can access these 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . notice four elevation markers. you load any required family type that is not in your project. In the drawing area in the right pane. and residential. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. click Training Files. click New. After the beginning exercises. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. In views that display elevation markers. from the product library. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. views. verify that the second option is selected. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. Creating the Project In this exercise.Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. To create the project file. under Create new. The new project opens.

locate the Project Browser. the view you see in the drawing area. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). delete. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. As you design and document your building model. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. content and building model reports. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. notice the Legends.views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. and duplicate levels. Ceiling Plans. and Elevations (Building Elevation). 8 Under Floor Plans. double-click Metric. change their properties. heights. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. display in the south elevation. 14 For File name. Sheets (all). reflected ceiling plan views. Two level lines. NOTE If you create a project without a template. and families in your project. Groups. then expand Floor Plans. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. double-click South. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. 10 In the Project Browser. These views are customizable: you can rename them. as well as change their names. expand Views (all). and delete them. 13 In the file window. Creating the Project | 59 . and elevation views created in the project by the template. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. You can add. will be accessible from the Project Browser. 7 If necessary. created by the template. such as schedules and legends. schedules. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. duplicate them. Families. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. and click Training Files. and other properties.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. Schedules/Quantities. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. enter Revit Retail Building. sheets.

You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. When you begin designing. or constrained. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. you will want to save your work frequently. enter 00 Foundation. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. After you modify the two default levels. the other levels move and change with it. verify that Project Files (*. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. and double-click South. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. Click Settings menu ➤ Options.rvt) is selected. expand Views (all). 17 Proceed to the next exercise. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial.15 For Save as type. You change the names of the 2 default levels. 16 Click Save. doors. and on the General tab. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and windows within the building model. and press ENTER. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. view the Save reminder interval. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. Adding Project Levels on page 60. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You learn how the levels are locked. so that when one level moves. to each other.

When you add the new level. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. not all the tabs are visible. enter -1800. which should display by default. and then move it up. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. enter 0. 13 On the Options Bar. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. enter 01 Entry Level. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. Next. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. right-click. and click Basics. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. view the Design Bar. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. click Level. 4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected.TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. 14 Click Plan View Types. This is the Options Bar. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. and press ENTER. 5 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. and click OK. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. Adding Project Levels | 61 . By default. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. and press ENTER. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. If it does not.

19 Click OK. using a different option. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. 16 Enter 3750. 18 In the Project Browser. If you create a level by copying it. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. click (Pick Lines). under Floor Plans. and press ESC. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. you add another level. click Modify to end the command. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. 25 Click to place the level line. or on the Design Bar. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. 26 Press ESC. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. click Level.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. right-click Level 3. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level.As you move the cursor. enter 3750. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. and for Offset. and move it slightly upward. Next. 23 On the Options Bar. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. 21 In the Project Browser. click Rename. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. and enter 02 Level. and rename the corresponding views.

Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. and you can move them independently.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that by moving the top level. If you select a level and click its lock. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. as shown. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. Adding Project Levels | 63 . all the levels move. the levels are no longer constrained.

click Grid. and specify the grid line endpoint. On the Design Bar. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. under Floor Plans. double-click 00 Foundation. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. In the following exercise. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. 3 On the Options Bar. In a later exercise. so that if the roof elevation changes. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. When the grid is complete. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. specify a start point for the grid line. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. the column height changes as well. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. Move the cursor up. select (Draw). click Modify. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. you constrain the column heights to the roof level.

and click to place the line. and click to place the line. and for Offset.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. enter 7500 mm. and press ENTER. click Grid. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. and click to place the line. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Enter A. enter 7500 mm. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . click (Pick Lines). for Offset. enter 4500 mm. On the Options Bar. Click to place the grid line. Next. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. for Offset. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. On the Options Bar. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project.

add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. as shown. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. On the Options Bar. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. click Grid. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. and specify the grid line endpoint. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. 11 On the Design Bar.8 Press ESC. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Grid.

21 Press ESC twice. 14 On the Options Bar. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. select grid lines C and 3. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. click (Aligned). 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. 18 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 15 Starting with grid line A. Creating a Column Grid | 67 . 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. 22 While pressing CTRL. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. click Dimension.

32 Click OK twice. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .5mm Bubble with Gap. Two pins display on the grid lines. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. until it is closer to grid line 5. and press ESC.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. and click OK. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. 31 For End Segments Length. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. until it is closer to grid line A. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. enter 6. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 50mm. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. click the value for Center Segment. and select None. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. click . you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. and select grid line A. click Modify. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. 33 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. By pinning these central grid lines. and press ESC. The pins are hidden. 26 In the drawing area. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. (Element Properties). select grid line 5. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. 29 In the Name dialog. At the left endpoint of the grid line. click Edit/New. and on the Options Bar. click and drag the blue circular grip up. 24 Press ESC. If necessary.

The original continuous grid lines are restored. select Grid : 6. click Modify. select all of the grid lines. 39 In the Type Selector. select Grid : 6. 37 Select the grid lines again.5mm Bubble with Gap. For Place By. click (Grid Intersection). 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC.34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. Creating a Column Grid | 69 . 35 In the Type Selector. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. and in the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.5mm Bubble. 36 On the Design Bar. and press ESC. click Finish. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. click Structural Column.

53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. If it is unlocked. and press ENTER. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. 47 Enter 9000. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. 52 On the Options Bar. select grid line A. lock it. 45 While pressing CTRL. click Activate Dimensions. select 01 Entry Level. for From. double-click 01 Entry Level. 46 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. and unlock it. 43 Press ESC. 48 On the Standard toolbar. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. Next.

The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. and click to place the target point of the camera. Creating a Column Grid | 71 .

named 3D View 1 by default. and click OK. and then copy them to subsequent levels. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Beams In this exercise. When you finish adding beams. Adding Beams on page 72. expand 3D Views. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The current view. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. displays in bold under 3D Views. In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. Right-click 3D View 1. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. enter To Building. under Views (all).

The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. under Floor Plans.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Options Bar. view the icons on the View Control Bar. The selected grid lines display as red. 10 In the Project Browser. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. select each grid line. the icon on the right side of the scale. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. 6 In the Type Selector. click Finish. 4 Click Medium. 8 While pressing CTRL. click Beam. The view is currently set to Coarse. double-click 01 Entry Level. under 3D Views. 9 On the Options Bar. click (Create Beam On Grid). Adding Beams | 73 . which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines.

The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. and click OK.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 14 Select one of the beams. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. select 06 Roof. click Modify. press and hold SHIFT. select 02 Level. and click Select All Instances. right-click. under Floor Plans. 12 On the View toolbar. 13 On the Design Bar. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. click (Default 3D View). double-click 01 Entry Level. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building.

When you created the columns.to the 5th level. right-click. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. view the Top Level parameter. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. double-click To Building. and click Select All Instances. 22 On the Options Bar. right-click. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. for Top Level. (Element Properties). You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 06 Roof. 20 Click Cancel. click 24 Press ESC. under Instance Parameters. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. All of the columns display as red. 25 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. resize the view to see the entire structure. under Constraints. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. and if necessary. Adding Beams | 75 . 21 With the column selected. select 06 Roof. and click OK. and click Element Properties.

as lines only. double-click South. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. 28 Save the drawing.NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. press ESC to exit the command before continuing. under Elevations. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area. but you want to display them in less detail. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser.

29 Proceed to the next exercise. verify that Attach to Grid is selected. under Floor Plans. and press ESC to end the command. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. click Framing Elevation. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Adding Braces In this exercise. To better add the braces to the structure. Adding Braces | 77 . you create 8 framing elevation views. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. Adding Braces on page 77. double-click 00 Foundation. 3 On the Options Bar. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid.

78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 8 In the Type Selector. NOTE Do not copy or array braces.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. 7 On the Design Bar. click Brace. but when placed the braces are placed. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. press ESC twice. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. double-click the elevation marker arrow. click to specify the start point of the brace. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary). and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. The associated framing elevation view displays. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. After you add the final brace. and when the endpoint snap displays. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. 11 Using the same technique. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown.

and press ENTER. enter 18000 mm. The height of the roof lowers. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. Adding Braces | 79 . Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. delete it and redraw it.

and press ENTER. 14 On the Standard toolbar. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. double-click 00 Foundation. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. under Floor Plans. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. enter 10000 mm. but this time add them from right to left. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. and press ENTER. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). click Activate Dimensions. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. as shown in the 3D view below. 21 Select grid line A. Adding Braces | 81 . 23 In the Project Browser. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. double-click 00 Foundation. 19 In the Project Browser. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. enter 12000 mm. under Floor Plans. and on the Options Bar. NOTE As you add braces.

you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. grid size. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. Creating a Foundation on page 82. double-click 00 Foundation. and if necessary. lock it. double-click South. under Floor Plans. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. beams. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .24 In the Project Browser. Test connectivity of the columns. 31 Save the drawing. click and roof height. 28 On the Standard toolbar. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. and drag it away from the structure. double-click {3D}. under 3D Views. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 29 In the Project Browser. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. 26 In the Project Browser. under Elevations.

Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. A warning displays. and expand Structural Foundations. under Extents. and drag it to the drawing area. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. In the View Range dialog. for View Range. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. select Unlimited. Click OK twice. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. After you load the pile cap family. for Level. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). expand Families. and press ESC twice. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. The pile cap has been added in the view. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. and how to load specific families into a project. click Training Files. under Floor Plans.rfa. double-click 00 Foundation. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.Before you can add the pile caps. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. 9 Close the warning dialog. under View Depth. The foundation pile cap now displays. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm. Creating a Foundation | 83 . In the Element Properties dialog. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Edit. and click View Properties.

When the final pile cap is placed.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. press ESC twice. 13 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click Create Similar. under 3D Views.

and brace families into the project. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Select one of the columns. You load new column. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. All columns in the building model display as red. beam. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . 15 Proceed to the next exercise. and braces that you used to create the building structure. right-click.14 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. beams. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. double-click {3D}.rvt. under 3D Views. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. you change the types of the columns. and click Select All Instances.

click (Default 3D View). 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 In the Type Selector. and click Select All Instances. 7 On the Design Bar. and click OK.6X15. 13 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. click Modify. select the braces in the elevation one by one. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model.2X101. click (Element Properties). 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 In the Type Selector. 19 On the Design Bar. enter 75mm. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. The building model displays the round hollow columns. you change the brace type. The brace type changes. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). click Modify. 18 In the Type Selector.5CHS. select M_Round Bar: 75mm. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_Round Bar : 25mm. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. In the following steps. double-click Elevation 1-a. the braces as well as the beams change. right-click. This not the size that you want to use.9. click Duplicate. click Brace. but it is the only size of its type currently available. 10 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. and click OK twice.3 In the Type Selector. enter 75mm. click Modify. for d. 15 In the Project Browser. for Type. under Dimensions. and changing its size parameter. 17 While pressing CTRL. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. 16 On the Design Bar.

rvt. and click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . 22 Proceed to the next exercise. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 3 Under Positioning. Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information.Origin to Origin. select m_RRB_structure_complete. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural. click Training Files. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Auto . After the files are linked. Linking the Structural Model on page 87.rvt.

select Levels 00 through 06. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. structural members. 9 In the drawing area. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select the linked Revit model. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. click Copy.4 In the Project Browser. click (Copy/Monitor). 5 On the Tools toolbar. and walls could also be copy/monitored. 8 On the Options Bar. In this case. select Multiple. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. 6 In the drawing area. while pressing CTRL. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. depending on the project. After the link is established. and click Select Link. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. however. double-click South. Grids. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. under Elevations.

delete the Level 2 floor plan. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. click OK. click Finish mode. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. 13 On the Design Bar.10 On the Options Bar. while pressing SHIFT. right-click Level 1. Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. 18 Using the same method. click Finish. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. 16 Click OK. 15 In the New Plan dialog. First. and click Delete. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . for Floor Plan views. under Floor Plans.

20 In the drawing area. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. and click OK. 24 In the New View Template dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. click OK. right-click. 21 In the drawing area. select the Topography : Surface. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. double-click 00 Foundation. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 26 In the Project Browser.19 In the Project Browser. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. 25 In the View Templates dialog. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . for Name. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. right-click. enter Floor Plans. under Floor Plans.

click Camera. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. and click OK. select Floor Plans. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. 34 In the 3D view that displays. double-click Site.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . 33 Click at the upper left of the grid. under Names. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.

Some other Revit Architecture elements. and railings are also created from sketches. To create floors.rvt. Adding Floors on page 92. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors.35 In the Project Browser. right-click 3D View 1. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. stairs. expand 3D Views. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . In this exercise. and click Rename. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. Adding Floors In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 36 In the Rename View dialog. enter To Building. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. such as roofs. and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files.

and then the first horizontal grid line. past the first vertical grid line. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. Leave this dimension unlocked. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. click Floor.Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click (Rectangle). The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. If the grid changes size. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. click Lines. At the top left corner of the grid. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. You are now in the Sketch Editor. Do not lock the dimension. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Dimension. select the top floor line. Move the cursor to the left. Adding Floors | 93 . On the Options Bar. On the Sketch tab. and elements in the current view display as gray.

They display on the floor sketch. click Modify. Do not lock the dimensions. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Enter 300.5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. and then press ESC. ■ 7 On the Design Bar. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. press ENTER. Move the cursor to the left dimension. At the top left corner of the grid. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. and change their values to 300 mm. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click the temporary dimension value. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. Select and lock the dimensions. select the top floor line. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor.

The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. using a different sketching technique. On the Sketch tab. Adding Floors | 95 . click Floor. and on the Options Bar. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. under Floor Plans. Next. click Lines. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. Select the three remaining floor lines. enter 1500mm. double-click 02 Level. click Quit Sketch. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. click Edit. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. click (Pick Lines). 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor.8 Select the floor. and press ESC. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. and for Offset. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and lock the dimensions. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. On the Options Bar. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. on the Design Bar.

22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. The 02 Level floor displays. under Floor Plans. and a lock icon displays. 20 On the Tools toolbar. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 14 On the Design Bar. click Floor. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. 18 On the Options Bar. click Lines. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. click (Rectangle). click Finish Sketch. click (Align). 16 On the Design Bar. Click the locks to constrain the floors. 17 On the Sketch tab. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. double-click 03 Level. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch.

and lock the edges. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and click OK. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. 32 Select the floor. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. click Edit. double-click 01 Entry Level. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser.24 On the Design Bar. under Views ➤ 3D Views. click Finish Sketch. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. under Floor Plans. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. Adding Floors | 97 . View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. 31 In the Project Browser. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 35 On the Sketch tab. double-click 05 Roof Garden. select 05 Roof Garden. double-click {3D}. click Finish Sketch. under Floor Plans. Alternatively. and on the Options Bar. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.

Click (Pick Lines). You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. click to place the roof line. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. 3 On the Design Bar. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. When a blue dashed line displays. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. click Lines. under Floor Plans. and press ENTER. Adding a Roof In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click 06 Roof. enter 1800 mm. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. To create the roof. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. click Training Files. ■ ■ For Offset. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. Adding a Roof on page 98.rvt.

6 Select grid line 5. for Offset. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). enter 300 mm. 7 On the Options Bar. click to place the roof line. 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above). move the cursor slightly below the grid line. and when the blue dashed line displays. Adding a Roof | 99 .

Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. click Finish Roof. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. ■ 12 On the Design Bar.10 Press ESC. and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area. 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click (Trim/Extend). select the roof.

19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof. on grid D. click Modify.14 On the Options Bar. click (Add new points to the slab shape). and click to specify the section. 17 On the Design Bar. move the cursor down below the roof. Adding a Roof | 101 . 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4. and press ENTER. click Section. 15 On the Options Bar. for Elevation. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter -100 mm.

click Modify. In section. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. under Construction. double-click 06 Roof. you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). click Edit/New. and on the Options Bar.20 On the Design Bar. select the roof. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. for Structure. click Edit. under Floor Plans. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 In the Project Browser. (Element Properties). select Variable. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. for Structure [1]. 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 30 Click OK 3 times. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile.

31 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. 41 Starting with the left front edge. zoom in to the roof. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. select each edge. 33 In the warning dialog. 37 If necessary. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. click OK. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. and press DELETE. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 38 In the 3D view. moving counter-clockwise. 40 In the Type Selector. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Roof Edge. Adding a Roof | 103 . In this case. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. click (Default 3D View). on the View Control Bar. select the section line. select Fascia : Fascia . Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia.

Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. click Modify.42 On the Design Bar. double-click To Building. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you add a curtain wall. under 3D Views. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. the curtain wall resizes with it. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. so if you resize the grid.

The type is saved in the project. enter 600 mm. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and move it slightly toward the building interior. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . select 05 Roof Garden. select 01 Entry Level. 3 In the Type Selector. and click OK. Under Construction. For Level. 6 In the Name dialog. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Click OK twice. click Duplicate. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. When you duplicate a type. click Wall. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. select Horizontal Grid Continuous.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Join Condition. for Spacing. for Type. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). click to place the first curtain wall segment. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. for Spacing. enter 2100 mm. For Offset. click 01 Entry Level. click Edit/New. enter 1050 mm. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. For Height. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. click Training Files.rvt. enter Retail Storefront. 10 When a blue dashed line displays.

click Dimension. and trim each curtain wall segment. the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. 15 On the View Control Bar. If the grid moves. If you want to hide them. double-click To Building. so they remain in the view. These dimensions are not in a sketch. 13 On the Design Bar. click (Trim/Extend). but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. you can delete the dimensions. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. under 3D Views. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and lock the dimensions.

and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating an Entrance on page 107. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. Creating an Entrance | 107 . you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt.

108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. To better work with the curtain wall panels. Do not select Columns. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 6 Under Visibility. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. clear one element to clear all the elements.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. and click None. 2 On the View Control Bar. under Views (all). you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. and double-click South. click All. 4 On the Model Categories tab. All the elements in the list are selected. as these usually represent internal pilasters. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 5 Under Visibility. 7 Click OK. under the element list.

click Detail Level ➤ Medium. and click OK. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. in this case an architectural elevation. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. select Architectural Elevation. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. press and hold CTRL. Creating an Entrance | 109 . 10 Select 1 panel. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. select System Panel : Solid. double-click {3D}. under 3D Views. in the Type Selector. click Modify. 12 With the panels selected. 16 On the View Control Bar. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. 17 In the Project Browser. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. 18 On the View Control Bar.9 On the Design Bar.

double-click To Building. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 21 Zoom to the front of the building. under 3D Views. double-click South.19 In the Project Browser. 110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. 20 In the Project Browser.

click Add or Remove Segments. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. 24 On the Options Bar. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). and unpin it. select another mullion to the right. 32 In the Type Selector. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. click Curtain Grid.23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. select One Segment. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. click Modify. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. Creating an Entrance | 111 . and click to select it. 30 On the Design Bar.

click (Default 3D View). 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select it.33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. press TAB until it is selected. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. and unpin it. and view the new entrance. 34 On the View toolbar. 36 Zoom in to the first panel.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. remove the mullions from the 2nd. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 .38 Press DELETE. 3rd. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. 39 Using the same process. 40 Optionally. and 4th panels. open the North elevation.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. click Training Files. and click View Properties. for Underlay. 5 Click OK. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Graphics. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 02 Level. 3 Right-click in the view.

click Callout. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. and click OK. which indicates you must draw the callout. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. 9 In the Project Browser. and click to complete the callout. 10 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. and click Rename.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select the grip closest to the callout head. enter Display Area. 8 Select the callout. The cursor changes to a pencil. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 .

as shown. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 14 Press ESC. and click Flip Section. click Section. 12 Draw a section line.Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 13 Select the section line. 16 Select the section box. right-click. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section.

enter Section Display Area. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. and click OK. Click (Rectangle). 18 In the Rename View dialog. 21 In the Type Selector.17 In the Project Browser. For Loc Line. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). select Basic Wall : Interior . for Prefer. and click Rename. under Floor Plans. click Wall. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. select Wall faces.135mm Partition (2-hr). 27 On the Options Bar. Lock both alignments. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. select Finish Face: Exterior. 26 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. right-click Section 1. click (Align). expand Sections (Building Section). Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. 24 On the Tools toolbar. 25 Press ESC twice.

select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. double-click 01 Entry Level. Next. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and lock the dimension. you modify them to be bulkhead walls. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting.) 36 Press ESC twice. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. 32 In the Type Selector. click Ceiling. and lock the dimension. double-click Section Display Area. Notice that the walls extend to the floor. 37 In the Project Browser. under Ceiling Plans.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. under Sections (Building Section). 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 38 On the View Control Bar.

double-click 01 Entry Level. under Ceiling Plans. and click OK. and press ESC. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. press TAB until you select the wall chain. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. and click OK. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 Press ESC. enter 2700 mm. enter 2700 mm.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. On the Options Bar. 47 In the Project Browser. under Constraints. Select the 02 Level Floor. click (Element Properties). for Height Offset From Level. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. 43 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click to select it. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. double-click Section Display Area. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. and click (Element Properties). click Attach. under Constraints. 41 On the Options Bar. and click to select the walls. under Sections. for Base Offset. for Top/Base. and click to select the walls. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 .

54 Click OK. click Cancel. click Edit/New. click Cancel. click (Rotate). 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. and click . click Edit. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 01 Entry Level. under Ceiling Plans. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. for Structure. under Construction. view the ceiling structure. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. 55 In the Type Properties dialog. 58 On the Edit toolbar. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. for Type. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog.49 In the Project Browser.

61 Press ESC. enter 45. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 . 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid.60 Click. and press ENTER.

double-click To Building. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 65 On the View Control Bar. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Shadows On. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. under 3D Views. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. 64 On the View Control Bar. 66 Optionally.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. click Shadows Off.

click Ref Plane. click Training Files.rvt. and click to create a reference plane to the right. 3 On the Options Bar. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. double-click 01 Entry Level. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 . and for Offset. and click to create a reference plane to the left. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. enter 1500 mm.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and copy it to the 05 Level. under Floor Plans. Move the cursor over grid line B. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building.

click Stairs. 7 Using the same method. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . C. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. 6 Select the left reference plane. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. click Modify. and 3.5 On the Design Bar. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. shorten the right reference plane. and specify a point to create first stair flight. 2.

■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. and specify a point. ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair. 12 In the Type Selector. click Wall. beyond the end of the stair. Move the cursor down. including its handrails. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . Click (Rectangle).225mm Masonry. and select the 2nd reference plane. select Basic Wall : Generic . with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. 10 On the Options Bar. select Finish Face: Interior. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. The complete stair displays. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line.

19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Wall faces. and specify a point away from the wall. and press ENTER. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. for Prefer. and lock the alignment. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Select the interior face of the wall.15 On the Tools toolbar. click Align. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. and click to select it. Click Modify. Lock the dimension. select the dimension value. 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. Select the bottom of the stair. click Dimension. 18 Using the same technique. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. enter 1200 mm. Select the wall.

and press DELETE. 28 On the Options Bar. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. and press DELETE. select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. 25 While pressing CTRL. click Door. select both reference planes. The stair and walls move to the left. a warning displays. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 .21 Select the dimension. clear Tag on Placement. Because the dimension is constrained. TIP To flip the door swing. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. 23 Select the stair. 27 In the Type Selector. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. 24 On the Standard toolbar. (Undo).

click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Under Constraints. 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. for Base Constraint. 40 Zoom in to the stairs. (Rectangle). You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. (SteeringWheels). 33 Select the stair.30 On the Design Bar. 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. Click OK. click Modify. select 00 Foundation. 35 On the View toolbar. (Default 3D View). select 05 Roof Garden. For Top Constraint. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. click Align. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. double-click 01 Entry Level. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. (Element Properties). 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. select all 4 walls. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). Click OK. under Floor Plans. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. for Multistory Top Level. 44 On the Tools toolbar. and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). but if you view the top level of the building. and move the cursor to spin the building model. click 36 On the View toolbar.

and lock the alignments. Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door.46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. and lock the alignment. (SteeringWheels). 52 In the Select Levels dialog. 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and click OK. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. on the View toolbar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. click see the roof. View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. click (Default 3D View).

By offsetting the base. click 59 On the View toolbar. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. double-click 01 Entry Level. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. (Default 3D View). Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. (SteeringWheels). For Top Constraint. and click OK. enter 300 mm. under Floor Plans. Under Constraints. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level.55 In the Project Browser. 56 Select the shaft. click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. for Base Offset. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties).

and click OK. click Wall. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. for Underlay. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . double-click 05 Roof Garden. under Floor Plans. 2 Right-click in the view. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and click View Properties.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. select 06 Roof. under Graphics. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

5 In the Type Selector. click Edit Profile. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click (Align). 7 On the Tools toolbar. and click Open View. 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. select Elevation: South. 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. select Basic Wall : Generic . click . and press ENTER. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. click Lines. and on the Options Bar.225mm Masonry. 15 In the error dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. and click (Fillet arc). 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. and then select the right face of the wall. click Remove Constraints. enter 9750. The exact placement is not important. 11 In the Go To View dialog. 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. 17 On the Options Bar. Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall.

select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. double-click {3D}. under 3D Views. 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. click . as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . and click (Circle). as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc. 22 In the Project Browser.18 In the upper right corner of the profile.

you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Planter : 1220 x 1220. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Type Selector.5 Meters. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. click Training Files.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry . between grid lines C and D. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. select M_RPC Tree .4. and open Metric\m_RRB_host. under Floor Plans. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. click Component. and press ESC twice. double-click 05 Roof Garden. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 . TIP After you place the 1st planter. 5 On the Basics tab. as shown.rvt. click Component. 6 In the Type Selector.

10 In the Project Browser. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. 17 While pressing CTRL. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. For Offset. View the roof. and on the Options Bar. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. as shown.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1. click Duplicate. double-click 01 Entry Level. (Element Properties). and in the Type Selector. 16 Click Apply.5 Meters. under 3D Views. and then click OK twice. for Type. enter 2400 mm. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. for Height.8 On the View toolbar. enter Japanese Cherry 1. click Edit/New. click Lines. 11 Select one of the trees. 21 On the Design Bar. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. enter 1500 mm. 18 In the Project Browser. double-click 05 Roof Garden. under Dimensions.5 Meters. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. under Floor Plans. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. and click OK. select M_RPC Tree . select the 2 remaining trees. 14 In the Name dialog. click (Default 3D View). 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. under Floor Plans. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Floor. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).

24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. for Offset. 28 Select the right vertical floor line.23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. 26 On the Options Bar. 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. 25 Using the same method. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. and click to sketch a line. and click to sketch a line. click (Draw). 29 On the Options Bar. and click to place the line. enter 0 mm. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 .

click (Trim/Extend). 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. clear Chain. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. 34 On the Tools toolbar. and click to finish the line.30 On the Options Bar. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. and click to finish the line. move the cursor up 900 mm. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. 32 Press ESC. 35 Select the line that you just drew.

create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. click Duplicate. select M_RPC Male : Alex. near Column E5. click Edit/New.38 On the Design Bar. enter Sidewalk. a photorealistic image displays. 49 On the Options Bar. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . 42 In the Name dialog. Next. as shown: (Element Properties). In plan view. click Finish Sketch. 39 Select the sidewalk. 45 Click OK. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. for Height Offset from Level. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. click Component. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. and click so he is facing the column. and on the Options Bar. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. When you render an image. for Type. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 43 Click OK twice. The completed sidewalk displays. enter -250 mm. select Rotate after placement. under Constraints. 48 In the Type Selector.

and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. 54 In the Type Selector. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1). and place it along the sidewalk behind him. select M_RPC Female : Cathy.NOTE If necessary. and click (Element Properties). click Camera. 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 53 Move the cursor clockwise. about 30 degrees. 52 In the Type Selector. you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. click the car. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click to place her on the sidewalk. 56 Press ESC twice. select M_RPC Beetle.

both Cathy and Alex will move with it. If the sidewalk changes height. click Pick Host. 60 In the Project Browser. click Pick Host. View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under 3D Views. and on the Options Bar. 64 Select Alex. under Elevations. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. for Offset. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . When you select a host for a component. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. and on the Options Bar. double-click West.59 In the Element Properties dialog. 63 Click the sidewalk. 66 Using the same method. enter -300 mm. under Constraints. Next. 65 Click the sidewalk. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. double-click To Building.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. and replace them with a service core. After the service core is positioned. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

click (Default 3D View). click 6 On the View toolbar. you delete the entire stairwell. walls. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. 3 Select the entire stairwell. under Floor Plans. and shaft opening. click Training Files. including the stairs. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. (SteeringWheels). Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click 05 Roof Garden. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. 4 Press DELETE. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core. 5 On the View toolbar.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser.

Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. click (Align). 11 In the Project Browser. 13 In the drawing area. expand Model.rvt. and click Create Instance. 10 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2.Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. click OK. click Training Files. 14 In the Project Browser. and notice that the linked file is listed. expand Groups. and on the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_RRB_core. and zoom in to the linked instance. double-click 00 Foundation. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. right-click m_RRB_core. click Modify.

Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. (SteeringWheels). Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. click Modify. (Default 3D View). and on the Options Bar. 18 Select the core. click (top down view).16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. and click to align the center. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. 20 On the View toolbar. click 21 On the View toolbar. or if the group layout is expected to change. ■ ■ Click grid line C. 17 On the Design Bar. and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. click Ungroup.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. 22 Proceed to the final exercise.rvt. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146. you add glass railings around the floor edges. After you modify it. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. click Training Files. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. where it is hosted within a railing family.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

double-click 02 Level. and Parapet.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. click OK. and open Metric\m_Conference. 5 Expand Railing. Handrail only. expand Families. click Edit.rvt. and select Glass. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. 3 In the Conference project. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. and expand Railings. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and double-click Lounge Perspective. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. and on the Options Bar. press and hold CTRL. expand Renderings. in the Project Browser.rvt. 13 On the Tools toolbar. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 . under Floor Plans. The rendering displays. and click to split the floor. click (Split). 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. The floor sketch displays. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 8 In the Project Browser. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays.

and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. verify that Chain is not selected. 25 Select grid line B.15 On the Design Bar. click Lines. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. and click to draw another line. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. click Modify. 24 On the Tools toolbar. click (Align). move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. and click to draw another line. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. and click the lock to lock the alignment. and on the Options Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. and click to place it.

For Offset. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. Lock the dimensions. click Dimension.26 Select grid line D. 33 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. for Type. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and click the lock to lock the alignment. enter 100 mm. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D.rvt project. click (Align). select Glass. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 30 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Tools toolbar. and click OK. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. click Railing Properties. 29 On the Design Bar. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. click Railing. 31 In the Revit dialog. and lock the alignment. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 .

click Camera. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. click Dimension. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 39 Click Finish Sketch.37 On the Design Bar.

42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view. You can view the railing that you just added.

152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .43 Close all project drawings.

lofty ceilings. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. balconies. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. 153 . exterior fire stairs. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. and a roof garden. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. NOTE For training purposes.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. slight modifications to the building design have been made. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section.

154 .

how to create section and elevation views. You learn how to create new views from existing views. section. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. you learn how to create views from a building model. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. including plan. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. elevation. 155 . You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise.

156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. expand Floor Plans. click Training Files. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.

8 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans.2 In the Project Browser. select Level 2. and click OK. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 9 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 4 In the Project Browser. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 . 7 In the Project Browser.

158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. under Floor Plans. and click 1: 1000. 12 In the Rename View dialog. 14 On the View Control Bar. double-click Vicinity Plan. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. 13 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Next. click the current scale. 11 Under Floor Plans. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. enter Vicinity Plan.

and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 . 16 Right-click. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise.rvt. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

select 1:100. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. 4 On the Options Bar. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. 3 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. click Elevation. select Elevation: Building Elevation. for Scale.rvt.

7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. click Modify. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 . click Modify.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. 8 On the Design Bar.

for Scale. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. click Section. and click OK. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. under Elevations (Building Elevation). ■ Move the cursor down. 15 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). enter South East. select Section: Building Section.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Rename View dialog. double-click South East. under Elevations. expand Floor Plans. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 14 In the Type Selector. 11 In the Project Browser. select 1:100.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 .Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents.

and click to place it.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. click Split Segment. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Click the midpoint of the section line.

click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 23 On the View Control Bar. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. expand Sections (Building Section). View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. 24 Select gridline F. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . click Modify. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. using the blue circular drag grip.21 On the Design Bar. and double-click Section 1.

you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save.25 On the Design Bar. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. click Modify. To create each view. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. 3 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans.rvt. for Scale. Creating Callout Views | 167 . double-click Level 1. select 1:50. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select Floor Plan. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. click Callout.Resulting callout view . 4 On the Options Bar. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair.

6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and select the callout boundary. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. ■ Select the middle grip. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. click Modify. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary.

12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 13 In the Type Selector. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. select Detail View: Detail. for Scale. Creating Callout Views | 169 . enter Enlarged Stair Plan. double-click Section 1. 14 On the Options Bar. under Sections (Building Sections). Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. click Callout. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. select 1:50. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays.7 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK.

and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .■ Move the cursor diagonally down. 16 Modify the callout leader as shown.

Creating Callout Views | 171 . under Detail Views (Details). 18 In the Rename View dialog. enter Roof Overhang Detail. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser.17 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. and click OK. expand Detail Views (Details). 20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

and click Open.rfa.Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. the elevation markers. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. under Floor Plans. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click Level 1. You change the appearance of the section mark head. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Custom-Section Head. click Training Files. open Metric\Families\Annotations. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser.

and click OK. scroll to Section Line. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. click the Annotation Objects tab. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Load into Project. 17 Under Category. and click OK. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 22 In the Name dialog. 12 For Section Tag. Section Tail – Filled. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . enter 12. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. clear any others. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. 19 Click OK. and can be applied to the section line. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 4 On the Design Bar. for Section Head. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. click Edit/New. scroll to Section Marks. select the current project. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 8 In the Name dialog. On the floor plan. enter Section Head – Custom. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. click Duplicate.The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. 10 On the floor plan. and click OK twice. and click OK.5mm Square. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. Section Tail .Filled. select Section Head . and select 3. and select 2. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. select the section line. 15 Under Category.Custom. .

click Edit/New. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. select 3. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. For Corner Radius. and click OK. and click OK. click Edit/New.23 In the Type Properties dialog. 27 Click OK twice. notice the square elevation markers that display. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 36 In the drawing. . select the current project.rfa. and on the Options Bar. select Square.5mm Square. for Elevation Tag. 40 Press ESC. open Metric\Families\Annotations. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the callout. Click OK. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. Click OK. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Duplicate. . clear all others. 39 Click OK twice. click Load into Project. for Callout Tag. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 12. For Line Weight.5 mm. select 12. and click Open. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. For Dimensions ➤ Width. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. 34 In the Name dialog. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. select Custom-Callout Head. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. enter 6 mm. On the floor plan. click Training Files.

view regions. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 45 For Line Pattern. expand Callout Boundary. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. and visual overrides.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. scroll down to Callout Boundary. filters. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. 46 Under Category. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . select Dash. You learn to create view templates. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. and select 4. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. and select 7. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. 49 Click OK. click the Annotation Objects tab. masking regions. 43 Under Category. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan.

The crop region displays as red. click Zoom to Fit. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. and apply it to multiple elevation views. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. and double-click East. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Training Files.rvt. under Elevations. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the View Toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. click (Show Crop Region). View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. and features blue triangular grips and break marks.Creating a View Template In this exercise. click (Hide Crop Region). Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. To accomplish this. 5 On the View Control Bar.

13 On the View Control bar. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On.Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. elevation markers. under Visibility. levels. clear Entourage. Creating a View Template | 177 . 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. grids. and section lines are now hidden in the view. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 11 Under Visibility. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Callouts. 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab.

click OK. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. edit the crop region as before. 16 In the View Templates dialog. 18 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. 20 Using the same method. right-click East. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.14 In the Project Browser. double-click North.rvt. and click Apply View Template. click Apply. under Elevations. 15 In the New View Template dialog. and click Create View Template From View. 19 In the Select View Template dialog. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. right-click North. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. and click OK. and click OK. 17 In the Project Browser.

select Level Below (Level 4). under Floor Plans. select Penthouse. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. and click Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. for Level. select Level Below (Level 4). click Edit. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. under Extents. for View Range. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. Under View Depth. for Bottom.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. right-click. double-click Penthouse. 2 In the Project Browser. Click OK twice.

select Roof Plan. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK twice.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. right-click. double-click Roof Plan. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Floor Plans. under Extents. for View Range. select Level 4. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 6 In the Project Browser. select Level 4. for Level. for Bottom. Under View Depth. click Edit.

Click OK twice. for Level. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Unlimited. for Bottom. click Plan Region. Move you cursor diagonally. click Edit. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. click Lines. 10 On the Design Bar.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . 13 On the Design Bar. select Unlimited. 11 On the Options Bar. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. under Extents. Under View Depth. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. In the left corner of the building. for View Range. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). click Region Properties.

3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. expand Floor Plans. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. under Views (all). 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .17 On the Design Bar. the fire rating of the walls. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. in this case. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. click the Filters tab. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. After you apply the filter. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill.rvt. click Modify. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

10 On the Filter tab. and click OK. and apply a color. click (New). 12 On the Filter tab. 7 In the Filters dialog. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. under Categories. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. click <No Override>. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. under Filters. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. select Solid Fill. 5 In the Filters dialog. Enter Hr. select the red color. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. select Fire Rating. 16 Click OK. enter Rated Walls. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. for Color. under Basic colors. click Edit/New. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . for Pattern. 9 Click OK. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Projection/Surface. 17 Using the same method. Select contains. and click OK. click Add. click Override under Patterns. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. and click OK. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click OK. and click OK. click Remove. select Walls. 11 Select Rated Walls. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. 14 In the Color dialog. for Rated Walls.

Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. you obscure geometry in portions of a view. Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .20 Click File menu ➤ Save. To accomplish this.

and click OK. 4 On the View Control Bar. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 3 In the Rename View dialog. as shown. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 8 Select the crop region. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Rename. click Masking Region. under Floor Plans. select Invisible lines. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 11 In the Type Selector. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. 9 On the View Control Bar. 5 On the View menu. 1 In the Project Browser.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 7 On the View menu.rvt. right-click. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. click Show Crop Region. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

14 On the Design Bar. 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan.12 On the Options Bar. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. click (Rectangle). 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Finish Sketch.

NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. right-click Unit 18 Plan . under Visibility. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. click black. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.Level 1. and click OK. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. right-click. Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. click <No Override> to apply a color. under Pattern Overrides. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. for Pattern. and click Rename. click in the Patterns field. click the current scale. 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. for Color. and click 1: 50. select Walls. select Solid fill. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. 11 Click OK twice. 7 Under Cut. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1.rvt. 4 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. and click Override. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. right-click.

click Modify. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. under Visibility. 16 Under Visibility. and click OK. clear Grids. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. clear Floors. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.

Working with Visual Overrides | 189 . and click Hide in View ➤ Category. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown.18 Right-click.

for Pattern. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. select Dash.20 Right-click. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. right-click. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. select the sofa. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. click <No Override> to apply a color. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 25 Click OK twice. click Override. click Projection Lines. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Color. click a purple color. 23 In the Color dialog. and click OK. By using the previous method to make the selection. under Lines. 21 Under Projection/Surface.

Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . click Modify. and click OK twice. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. 30 On the Design Bar. click By Category Override. 29 In the Color dialog. 32 Select one of the lamps. right-click. select a bright green color.28 For Color. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. click .

192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. click .33 On the View Control Bar. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. how to add views to the sheets. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet.

and click View. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 . The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. select A0 metric.Creating Sheets. click Training Files. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Sheet. and click OK. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar.rvt. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. right-click.

Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. For Sheet Name. enter Site Plan. Click OK. 5 When the title block highlights.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). click Modify. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . 7 On the Design Bar. and select the title block. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. 3 In the Project Browser. enter A101. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog.Unnamed. click Modify. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . For Sheet Number.

The new project information displays in the titleblock. Smith. For Project Status. enter For Approval.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. For Client Name. enter 2009-1. for Project Address. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter 15 May. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 . 14 Click OK. For Project Number. 2009. enter Freighthouse Flats. click Edit. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. enter J. under Other. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. MA 12345 12 Click OK. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. For Project Name.

196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . 17 In the Project Browser.Layout Plan A104 . Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. for Name. and click OK. and click Save. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.rvt. and click OK. you add views to these sheets.Sections A108 . 18 In the Sheet Title dialog.Elevations A106 . and click Rename.Elevations A107 . 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select the new sheet name.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. enter Floor Plan.Stairs In the following exercise. right-click.Elevations A105 . Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. select A0 metric.

Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all).Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. select Level 1. and click to place it. and click to place the view.Floor Plan. Adding Views to Sheets | 197 . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. under Sheets (all). The red border around the view no longer displays. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. 4 On the Design Bar. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.Elevations. click Modify. 6 In the Project Browser. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. double-click A102 . double-click A104 . drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 2 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and drag it to the sheet.

12 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet.Sections. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. under Sheets (all). click Modify. click Modify. double-click A107 . Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). and click to place it. and click to place it. align it with the East elevation. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections).

click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 Select title bar. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. zoom in to the grip. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. and click OK. select 1:5.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. and press TAB until it highlights. and on the Options Bar. Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . for View Scale. move the cursor over it. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. .

200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser.Stairs. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. click Modify. double-click Level 1. 18 Under Floor Plans. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. under Sheets (all). double-click A108 . 19 On the Design Bar. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. and click to place it. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. under Floor Plans.

click Modify. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. under Sheets (all). enter 16700 mm. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. and press ENTER. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 . 5 On the Design Bar. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. In order to do this. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views.rvt.Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. right-click. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser.Sections. double-click A107 . 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. and click Activate View. 2 Select the building section view. and then make changes and deactivate the view. you must first activate the view on the sheet.

under Elevations (Building Elevation). and click Deactivate View. double-click North. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. 7 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.6 Right-click. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. You modify the view to hide the view title.rvt. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. After you create the sheet.

right-click. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. enter Title Sheet. select the new sheet name. 3 In the Project Browser. enter T. click Camera. under Floor Plans. select A0 metric. For Sheet Name. The camera view displays. and click OK. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. 7 Place the camera as shown. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. and click Properties. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. double-click Level 1.Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 . Click OK. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. Under Camera. 11 On the View Control Bar. For Target Elevation. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. 13 In the Project Browser. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . 14 Under 3D Views. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. for Eye Elevation. 12 On the View Control Bar. enter 18000 mm. enter 100000 mm. Click OK. For Far Clip Offset. select Far Clip Active. under Sheets (all).Title Sheet. double-click T .8 On the Options Bar. Under Extents. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to place it in the center of the sheet. enter 1500 mm. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building.

click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. select Scale (locked proportions). and on the Options Bar. for Show title. under Graphics. for Height. click Duplicate. select No. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. 24 Click OK twice. Under Model Crop Size. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 19 Select the view on the sheet. enter 635 mm. click Modify. enter Viewport/no title mark. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. .15 With the view selected. click Modify. 22 In the Name dialog. 25 On the Design Bar. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . click Edit/New. click Size. Click Apply. on the Options Bar. and then click OK. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet.

206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .26 Click File menu ➤ Save. and close the exercise file.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. such as room and window schedules. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. You also learn to create different types of schedules. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. such as doors and windows. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. Because of the open style floor plan. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command.rvt. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 207 . in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. Tagging Objects In this lesson. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Level 1.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture.

click Room Separation. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. right-click in the Design Bar. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. and click Room and Area.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). as shown: 5 Using the same method. move the cursor to the right.

7 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Tags dialog.6 Using the same method. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. click Modify. click Load. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 . Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.

16 On the Design Bar. type 2400 mm. indicating that it can be edited. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 14 For Offset.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and the rectangle contains the room tag.rfa. click Training Files. and select the room tag. and click to place the room and tag. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. and press ENTER. verify that Tag on placement is selected. click Modify. type U18-1. 11 In the Tags dialog. click it. 13 On the Options Bar. click Room. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. The room tag number displays in blue. click OK.

click Room. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. 19 On the Design Bar. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. click Modify. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 23 Using the same method. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . place rooms and tags.18 Click the room text label. type Entry. Dining. Sequential letters are also supported. Click to place the new room and tag. and press ENTER. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. 22 Click the room text label. type Kitchen. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2.

expand Lines. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. under Floor Plans. double-click Unit 18 Plan . 27 On the Design Bar. and moving clockwise.Level 2. and click OK. click Room Tag. click Modify. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. but they need to be tagged. on the Model Categories tab. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. The rooms are already placed.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Room Separation. 29 On the Design Bar. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair).

Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. expand Floor Plans. you learn how to place door and window tags. 3 On the Options Bar. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Tag ➤ By Category. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. in the Project Browser.Level 1. clear Leader.rvt. 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 .rvt. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

101-106. for Name. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. and press ENTER.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. next to Rows. select Corridor. for room 101. 11 Using the same method. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . select Storage. The room Number is U17-46. 10 Edit the number to be 101. add 5 more rooms. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. For 104. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. For 102. type Building Entry. type Corridor. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. For 103. and press ENTER. type Storage. For 105. and press ENTER. click New.

4 Click OK twice. double-click Level 1. For Room Separation. type Stair. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Visibility. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER.rvt. select 9. For Weight. click Override. and modify room names. 13 Save the file. under Projection/Surface. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . In the Line Graphics dialog. expand Lines.■ For 106. click the Lines field. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. Under Custom colors. under Floor Plans. place rooms from a program list. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and click OK. In the Lines field. click the bright green swatch. click the Color field. you add room separation lines. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. click Modify. click Room. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 . 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. First. click Room Separation. draw the horizontal line.

14 For Offset. type 2400 mm. 13 On the Options Bar. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Room.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 11 On the Options Bar. select 101 Building Entry. select 102 Storage. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). for Room.

Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. 20 While pressing CTRL. 17 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. under Floor Plans. under Schedules/Quantities.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. double-click Room Schedule. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. place the following rooms. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). and zoom in to the Corridor. 16 Using the same method. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103.

29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. 24 Open the Room Schedule.21 On the Options Bar. clear Room Bounding. Floor Finish. and click Add. and click OK. 31 For Key Name. under Constraints. type As Selected. for Rows. while pressing CTRL. select Base Finish. and click OK. click Schedule/Quantities. click New. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and Wall Finish. 30 On the Options Bar. (Element Properties). 22 In the Element Properties dialog. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. click 23 On the Design Bar. click Modify. under Available fields. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Category. type Units. select Rooms. and for all 3 finishes. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. 27 Select Schedule keys. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

select Rooms. select Units. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. 44 On the Options Bar. select Units. click (Filter Selection). Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. select Room Style. right-click Room Schedule. 43 In the Filter dialog. for Room Style. click Edit. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. 42 On the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). and click Add. 37 Open the Room Schedule. 36 Click OK twice. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. for Available fields. 38 Under U17-8. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . under Other. double-click Level 1. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Schedules/Quantities. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. for Room Style. and click Properties.32 Using the same method. under Floor Plans. for Fields. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. click Check None. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. under Identity Data. and click OK. and click OK. 33 In the Project Browser.

type Room Type. under Views (all). and apply it to the Level 1 view. 103. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. select Room Style. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. for Name. click the Color Scheme field. and click OK. 48 Save the file. 104. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. select Public. right-click Level 1. for Color. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. expand Floor Plans. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. under Floor Plans. For rooms 102 and 105. click OK. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. select Service. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. (Duplicate). type Room Type. and click Properties. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. click OK. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . at the warning prompt. under Graphics. click 5 For Title. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). and 106. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. 9 In the Project Browser. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser.46 Open the Room Schedule. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and double-click Level 1.rvt.

a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. and clear Room Separation. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). and click OK. click Edit Color Scheme. click Edit.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. expand Lines. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. select Room Type. click Modify. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. click the value in the Color column. under Visibility. under Schemes. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. 19 On the Options Bar. 14 Click OK twice. click Color Scheme Legend. clear Visible. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . select the color legend. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

and click OK. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. select blue. 23 Using the same method. 30 On the Design Bar. 24 Click OK. type 25 mm. under Custom color. on the Options Bar. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Size. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. 28 Under Title Text. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. 29 Click OK twice. type 5 mm. under Graphics. click Edit/New. (Element Properties). click 26 In the Element Properties dialog.22 In the Color dialog. respectively. for Swatch Width.

select Rooms. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. under Sections. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. select Room Type. double-click Building Section. click Edit. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . under Visibility. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. click Color Scheme Legend. for Color Scheme. right-click Building Section. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and select Properties. and click OK. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. 35 Click OK twice. under Graphics. under Sections.

and click OK. select Units. under Identity Data. 46 Click . select all the rooms in the stairwell. (Filter Selection). 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 41 On the Options Bar. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). and click OK. for Room Style. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. select Rooms. 42 In the Filter dialog. select Public. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 45 While pressing CTRL. click .40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. click Check None. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. and click OK. for Room Style.

under Schedules/Quantities. under Key Name for the new row.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. for Rows. under Identity Data. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. double-click Room Style Schedule. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . and click OK. and click . 49 In the Element Properties dialog. click New. for Room Style. select Service. excluding the stairwell spaces. type Suites. 54 While pressing CTRL. 51 On the Options Bar.

The color fill will extend to the roof. for Room Style. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. select Areas and Volumes. and click OK. The color fill extends to the roof. select Suites. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. verify that At wall finish is selected. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor.55 Click . Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. 59 Under Room Area Computation. under Volume Computations. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. under Identity Data. but not beyond it. select the room on the left side of the top floor. and click OK. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog.

66 Click OK. type -254 mm. 72 On the Design Bar. select Loft. for Upper Limit. under Constraints. 71 Click OK. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). under Constraints. and click 65 For Limit Offset. 68 Click . select the stairwell room. select Level 2. click Modify. the dining room. 70 For Limit Offset. and the living room. type 0.0. . 69 In the Element Properties dialog. 67 On the first level. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. for Upper Limit. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 .Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level.

246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .73 Save the file. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials.rvt. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. under 3D Views.

under Available fields. 5 On the Design Bar. 3 While pressing CTRL. Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 . select Material: Description. Clear Itemize every instance. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. Select Grand totals. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. click Modify. and click Add. select Roofs. under Category.Insulation on Plywood Deck . 9 Using the same method. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog.EPDM. select Family and Type. click Family and Type. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. For Then by. and click OK. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. 4 In the Type Selector.

18 In the Calculated Value dialog. 21 Click OK. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. 17 Click Calculated Value. 12 Click OK.40 50. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. and click OK twice.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. type Estimated Cost. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. select Material: Area. for Name. click Estimated Cost. select Material: Cost. select Calculate totals. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. under Available fields. 19 For Type. and click Add. 20 For Formula. Under Field formatting. and click Properties. under Other. click Edit. select Currency. 23 For Field formatting. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). for Material: Cost. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. for Fields. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and under Fields. select Calculate totals. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. click the Formatting tab. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays.

you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. for Currency. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. 27 In the Format dialog. creating a generic tag to tag the family. and reporting the shared parameters. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 28 For Unit symbol. In this lesson. adding the shared parameters to a family. The cost fields are formatted correctly. ensuring consistency across families and projects. you create an exiting plan for the building. you create a shared parameter file. select $. 26 In the Project Units dialog. and schedule the total distance of each path. either within family components or within the project template. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. 31 Save the file. not just for currency. click the Format value. regardless of category. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . 29 Select Use digit grouping. and are defined and stored in an external file. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson.35 The Estimated cost is calculated.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. You draw a travel path line. These shared parameters can be added to any family. Digit grouping. can be used for any number-based parameter. tag the line. for Rounding. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. which inserts commas after every three digits. 30 Click OK twice.

type Travel Distance.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click New. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .rvt. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. click Training Files. click Create. for Name. type OfficeStandardsParameters. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 11 Click OK twice. type Path ID. 9 Under Parameters. for Name. and click Save. for Name. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. for Type of Parameter. and click OK. type Exiting. select Length. click New. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. under Floor Plans. for File name. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Under Parameters. click New. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters.rvt.txt. and click OK. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. under Groups. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Training Files.

7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and select Instance. for Group parameter under. otherwise the family loads into the current project. under Dimensions. group it under Dimensions. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click Add. under Parameter Data.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. select Shared parameter. and click OK. 8 Select Instance. 4 In the Family Types dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected.rvt. 13 Click Apply. 14 On the Design Bar. select Constraints. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. click Load into Projects. 3 On the Design Bar. 10 Using the same method. for Travel Distance Formula. under Parameter Type. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. under Parameters.rvt. 11 Click OK. and click OK. 15 If necessary. under Parameters. and click OK. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. in the Load into Projects dialog. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. 12 In the Family Types dialog. 9 In the Family Types dialog. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. and click Select. following the equals symbol (=). click Family Types. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. Click Training Files. click Add. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 .rfa. If you have multiple projects open. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. type Length. and click OK. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

under Parameters. 24 Click OK twice. select Travel Distance. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. click Select. under Category Parameters. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 19 On the Design Bar. select Travel Distance. and click OK. click Training Files. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. click Label.17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click Label. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. (Add 26 On the Design Bar.rft. click parameter(s) to label). 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. click (Add Parameter).

click Modify. and move it down.rfa. for File Name. type M_Travel Distance Tag. 33 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 29 In the drawing window. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 .rvt is selected. and press DELETE. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. click Load into Projects. 32 In the Save As dialog. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. 35 Save the file. select Path ID.28 On the Design Bar. and click Save. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog.

select Chain. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. 4 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 6 Move the cursor to the right. above the exterior door as shown. under Floor Plans. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser.Placing. and click in the center of the corridor. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. double-click Exiting Plan . 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .rvt. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise.Tagging. After the lines are tagged. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress.Level 1. click Component.

Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser.7 Move the cursor down. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 . verify that Chain is selected.Tagging. Placing. and click outside of the building. click Modify. and click OK. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.Level 2. 8 On the Design Bar. and click (Element Properties). select the 2 dashed travel lines. under Constraints. click Component. 10 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. move the cursor near the right corner. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. for Path ID. click Tag ➤ By Category. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. through the door. click Modify. 17 On the Options Bar. clear Leader. type 1-1. double click Exiting Plan . 13 While pressing CTRL. 12 On the Design Bar.

256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 23 Move the cursor down. click Component. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. 21 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and click.19 Move the cursor up through the door. and click above the door to the stair. move the cursor to the left. and click in the stair.

and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . 27 On the Design Bar. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. 30 Using the same method. and click OK. 28 While pressing CTRL. click Modify. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. and click OK. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. . 26 Select each of the travel path lines.24 On the Design Bar. Placing.Tagging. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. type 2-1. for Path ID. 33 For Name. click Modify. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. type Level 1 Exit Distance. under Category. click Tag ➤ By Category. under Constraints. 32 In the New Schedule dialog.

select Path ID. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 46 In the Project Browser. select Calculate totals. type Level 2 Exit Distance. 42 Click OK. under Available fields. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 41 Under Fields. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Filter by.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. and in the third field. 49 Click OK twice. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Add. 36 For Filter by. in the second field. and click OK. select Path ID and Travel Distance. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. 39 Clear Itemize every instance.rvt. click Training Files. under Schedules/Quantities. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. select Travel Distance. in the third field. 40 Click the Formatting tab. type 2-. under Other. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. and click Properties. 45 In the Rename View dialog. while pressing CTRL. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 43 In the Project Browser. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. for Filter. 35 Click the Filter tab. and under Field formatting. 50 Save the file. type 1-. select contains. 38 For Sort by. click Edit. 44 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. select Path ID. in the first field.

click the Fields tab. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. 9 Click OK twice. click the Value field.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Walls. 4 Under Available fields. and click Properties. right-click Generic . expand C . and click . and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. under Categories. right-click the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall.Interiors ➤ C10 . for Assembly Code. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description.152 mm. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . and select C1010145 . click Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 . 7 In the Type Properties dialog.Fixed Partitions.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. 10 In the schedule. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Partitions . select the following fields. and click View.Partitions ➤ C1010100 . under Identity Data.

click the File Data Source tab. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. 1 On the File menu. 6 Click Finish.mdb). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. click Create. and click Next. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .11 Close the exercise file. and click Next. 3 Click New. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Database Name. under Database. click Training Files. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. select a location for the database file. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. the database display may be different than that shown. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 8 In the New Database dialog. type Revit_Project. 11 Click OK 3 times. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format.mdb. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. click OK. and click OK to create the database. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog.rvt. 9 Under Directories. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays.

One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. in addition to the Id column. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. 13 Close the exercise file. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. Additionally. For example. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types.

262 .

Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. 263 . You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

plywood.Detailing 7 In this tutorial. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. like a standard door header condition. 297 . and metal studs. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. In order to detail from the building model. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. In the callout view. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. you trace over the building model geometry. These components display at the required scale. add detail components.

The roof overhang detail displays.rfa. 5 In the alert dialog. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model.rvt. as well as detail lines. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. Exact location is not important. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. double-click the detail callout head. You load detail components. click Training Files. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. They are also view specific. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. you detail the view of the roof edge. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. and click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 7 In the drawing area. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . which means that all detail components. region objects.Detailing the View In this exercise. and insulation objects. select As underlay. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. After you add components. click Detail Component.

18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. click Edit/New. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point.8 Delete the component. 19 On the Design Bar. click Repeating Detail. click (Element Properties). click Modify. enter 406. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 In the Name dialog. 15 For Spacing. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. select Corrugated Metal. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 10 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. Detailing the View | 299 . Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar.5mm. 17 In the drawing area. for Pattern ➤ Detail. 16 Click OK twice. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents.

click Load.20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 22 On the Options Bar. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. ■ ■ Click Modify. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. click Training Files.rfa. click (Move). and click Open. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. click Detail Component. 24 In the Type Selector. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. and on the Edit toolbar.

30 In the Type Selector. 29 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. Detailing the View | 301 . 33 In the Type Selector. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point.rvt. click Detail Component. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. and click Open. click Training Files. click OK. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. press SPACEBAR 3 times. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. and place it in the detail view as shown. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. you load them as a group from a single file. 31 To properly orient the component.Because you still have several components to load.

NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. 35 On the Options Bar. 37 Click Modify. 38 Select the horizontal segment. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. select Chain. click the Flip instance arrows. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. and click Modify.

For Offset. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. and on the Edit toolbar.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. click Detail Component. ■ Click Modify. enter 140mm. click (Move). 42 Click Modify. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. select to near side. click Insulation. Detailing the View | 303 . Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. as shown.

select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. and lock the component. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. meaning they display only in this view. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. select Thin Lines. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 47 In the Type Selector. as shown. 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. Like detail components. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. 2 In the Type Selector. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you add lines to your detail. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component.45 In the Type Selector. Adding Detail Lines on page 304.rvt. 51 Click Modify. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. click Detail Lines. they are view specific. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar.

For Offset. and press ENTER. click Detail Lines. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). as shown. and press ENTER. 5 Select the vertical plywood component.4 Click Modify. enter 10mm. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. Adding Detail Lines | 305 . 11 In the Type Selector. For Offset. click Detail Lines. as shown. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). enter 10mm. 7 In the Type Selector. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. 10 On the Design Bar. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. select Thin Lines. select Medium Lines. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result.

17 Draw a horizontal line as shown.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. and draw the detail lines as shown. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and clear Chain. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. select Chain. click (Draw). as shown.

and press ENTER. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. select the Penthouse level line. Click (Pick Lines). and click Properties. 22 In the Project Browser. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. select Thin Lines. right-click. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. click Detail Lines. 24 On the View Control Bar. When you turn the display model off. For Offset. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. select Do not display. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view.18 In the Type Selector. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. select Vapor Barrier. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. and click OK. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. draw the detail lines as shown. enter 10mm. Adding Detail Lines | 307 . 26 In the Type Selector.

33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. Adding Text Notes on page 308. 32 Click Modify. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. click Detail Component. select M_Break Line. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. you add text notes to complete the detail. press SPACEBAR as necessary. 30 In the Type Selector.29 On the Design Bar.

click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rvt. and click to place the dimension. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Click again to specify the location of the text box. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes | 309 . 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. 2 On the Options Bar. Enter the text. 6 Click Modify. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. click Dimension.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. click Text.

right-click. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. Creating Detail Components on page 310.. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail).rvt. for Suffix. and save the exercise file. click Select All Instances. and click the dimension text. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. right-click. click 6 In the Filter dialog. on the Options Bar.7 Select the dimension line. and click OK. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. enter Roof Overhang Detail . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. select a text note. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click OK. under Text Fields. (Filter Selection). right-click. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. click Roof Overhang Detail. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Rename. enter Typ.Keynotes. and press DELETE. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser.

while pressing CTRL. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. 16 Click Modify. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework.rft. and click Open. select all the coping linework. pressing TAB. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. 14 Click Modify. select Medium Lines. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.7 Click Modify. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and selecting the chain. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. in the Type Selector. Creating Detail Components | 311 . 15 Use a window to select all linework. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. click Training Files.

click Load. select the coping. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. The original linework remains selected. Adding Keynotes on page 312. click Load into Projects. 27 On the Design Bar. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. and click Open. double-click it in the Project Browser. navigate to your preferred location. While pressing SHIFT. 25 In the Filter dialog.Keynotes view is not the open view. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. and click Save. and the component can be placed in the detail. 30 In the drawing area. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 22 Click Modify. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 Press DELETE. 21 To place the component. enter Roof Edge. 23 Using a window. you place keynotes on objects. click Detail Component. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 24 On the Options Bar. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . for File name. clear Detail Items.18 In the Save As dialog. 28 On the Options Bar. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component.rfa. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. click . click Training Files. 31 Using the same method used previously. delete the underlying linework. click Detail Component. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping.

B5. 6 Click Modify. Click to place the leader arm. In the Keynotes dialog.rvt. use keynote 07645. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. and click Open. click Training Files. 63mm Rigid Insulation. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. Adding Keynotes | 313 . 19mm Plywood. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.D11.C1. click Edit/New. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. use keynote 06160. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.rfa. 2 In the alert dialog. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. click Keynote ➤ Element. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. (Element Properties).Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. For the metal coping. Roof Edge4. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. select the metal fascia with drip edge. and click OK.

D11.D1. click in the Value column. You do this in order to keynote the component. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. use keynote 06160. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. and click .20 Ga.I1. 12 On the Design Bar. use keynote 09250. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. FasciaProfile_1.F1. 18 Save the file. use keynote 06110. click Keynote ➤ Element. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing .A8.G1. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. navigate to 07645. use keynote 06110. For the 50 x 150. using keynote 07460.F1. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component.9 In the Type Properties dialog. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. 11 Click OK 3 times. 22mm Corrugated Steel . you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 17 Keynote the component. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. select Corrugated Metal. use keynote 06110. For the 50 x 300. 15 In the Type Selector. For the 50 x 200.

5 In the drawing area. 20 Click OK 3 times. click Lines. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. and click (Element Properties).Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Detail Component. navigate to your preferred location. for File name. 4 In the Type Selector. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. select Medium Line Detail Component.rft. and m_Light Line Detail Component. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 24 While pressing CTRL. click Load into Projects. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . 6 Lock the line. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 19 In the Name dialog. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. click Load. and click Open. 16 Select the component. click Training Files. 9 On the Design Bar. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. 11 Press DELETE. and click Modify. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Save. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. and select the right end point. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select the left end point of the reference line. select Medium Lines. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 22 On the Options Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click Open. 13 In the Type Selector. 15 Click Modify. 8 In the Save As dialog. click Detail Component. click Edit/New. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components.rvt. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. click Training Files.

39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530.A5. 31 Select the component. and assign it keynote 07260. and click . name the component 50 x 200 Framing. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. click Detail Component. 37 Click OK 3 times. and hidden) used in the view. and click . 30 Click Modify. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 42 Using the same method used previously. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Detail Component. on the Edit toolbar. 40 Click Modify. and click . 28 In the Type Selector.A1.G1. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof.25 Next. name the component Air Barrier. 27 On the Design Bar. click in the Value column. You add the components to the project and keynote them. enter EPDM Membrane. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. invisible. against the 19mm plywood. 49 With the component selected. and click . 29 In the drawing area. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 46 Click Modify. select m_Light Line Detail Component. 48 Using the same method used previously. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 44 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 47 Select the component. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. 34 In the Name dialog. 41 Select the component just added. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. click Duplicate. and assign it keynote 06110. 38 On the Design Bar. click (Move). and click the lower end at the break line. click Edit/New.

54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. and click .Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. select Chain. 52 In the Type Selector. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. 53 On the Options Bar. 55 Click Modify. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. click Detail Component. leaving the detail component lines. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 .

61 In the drawing area.rfa. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. 60 On the Design Bar. Air Barrier. name the component Vapor Barrier. click Keynote ➤ Element. select the component. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.A4. and Vapor Barrier. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Load into Projects.58 Using the method used previously. in the Type Selector. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. 63 In the drawing area. click Detail Component. and assign it keynote 07260.rfa. 68 In the drawing area. select Invisible Lines. 50 x 200 Framing. 67 In the Type Selector.

and click . 72 Save the file. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes.txt. click File menu ➤ Save. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing..A9. Enter 07463. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. click Browse. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting.A4. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. and press ENTER. add a keynote for the component. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. and press TAB. 70 Using the method used previously. and close the text editor.A1.rvt. under Keynote Table. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. and press TAB. and assign it keynote 07210. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. Enter 07460. 3 In the text editor. 71 In the drawing area. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. The database file opens in a text editor. name the component Batt Insul.69 Select the component. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 .

You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. select all the keynotes. under Path Type. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. navigate to 07463. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet.A1. 14 Save the file. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. These details do not update with changes to the building model. 11 Click Modify. and click OK. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. you learn how to create a drafted detail. After you create a drafting view. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. 9 In the drawing area. select Absolute. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. and click OK.txt. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click to place the leader. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. click Keynote ➤ Element. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). and click to place the note. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. 13 Click Modify. In the Type Selector. Each keynote displays as a simple number. and click Open.

For Colors. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. 7 In the Rename View dialog. for Scale. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select 1 : 5. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. click Training Files. and click OK. select Black and White.dwg. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 . Click Open. 6 In the Project Browser. For Positioning.rvt. right-click Drafting 1. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. and click Rename. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. The detail that you import is in DWG format.Center to Center is selected. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. and click OK. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. The detail is imported as an import symbol. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. enter EPDM Metal Coping. verify that Auto .rvt.

select Reference other view. for New. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. click Callout. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. 6 Select the callout. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. 3 On the Options Bar. delete the existing value. 5 Click Modify. 10 In the Rename dialog. and click Properties. click Rename. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping.No Reference. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Edit/New. enter Detail . Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. 12 Click OK twice. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser.

15 Under Drafting Views (Detail ./Det. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet.Elev. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. 18 Save the file./Sect. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. double-click A105 . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 . The callout is updated with the sheet information. click Modify.No Reference). and double-click the callout. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser.

5 In the Type Selector. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. select Gypsum-Plaster. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. click Filled Region. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 Click OK 3 times. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Header @ Sliding Door. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. click Duplicate.rvt. 11 In the Name dialog. . Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. click Region Properties. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. and click OK. and click OK. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Component. enter Gyp. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. for Name. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. for Name. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. Board. click Edit/New. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 3 On the View Control Bar. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

and on the Edit toolbar. select Wide Lines.15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 18 While pressing CTRL. 16 Select the left edge of the region. click 22 On the Options Bar. and enter 20. 20 On the Design Bar. select the width dimension. 17 Click Modify. Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point. 19 In the Type Selector.5mm. click Finish Sketch. click . select the left and bottom edges of the region. (Mirror). Draw a rectangle as shown. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. click (Draw). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 .

30 In the Name dialog. click Region Properties. click Duplicate.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point.Finish. click Filled Region. enter Wood . 24 Select the mirrored region. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. . 33 Click OK 3 times. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. Move the cursor up. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. 25 Click Modify. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. select Wood . Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. and click above the top of the region as the end point.Finish. click Edit/New. for Name.

select Medium Lines. click . click (Align). in the Type Selector. 37 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click (Rectangle). 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. sketch the new region as shown. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. select Medium Lines. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. Draw a rectangle as shown. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point.5mm. 40 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar.34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and select the right edge of the wood region. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. 39 In the Type Selector. verify that the thickness is 19mm. 38 On the Design Bar.

46 On the Tools toolbar. enter 10mm. (Align). enter 6mm. 47 Click the reference plane. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. click Finish Sketch. 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. click 48 Click Modify. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. For Offset. and press ENTER. For Offset. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region.42 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. and press ENTER.

and press ENTER. and select the bottom horizontal line. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . and click to select the point. 56 On the Design Bar. enter 0.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). Move the cursor left 25mm. click (Trim/Extend). 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. click Finish Sketch. and click to select the point. 54 On the Tools toolbar. Move the cursor right 25mm. For Offset. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. Select Chain. Move the cursor down 305mm. and click to select the point.

select the height dimension. select Medium Lines. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Training Files. For Offset. and click Open. 68 Click Modify. 69 Select the bolt. 61 Click Modify. click Detail Lines.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar.2mm. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. enter 3mm. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. 62 Select the left detail line. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . top. enter 76. 60 Select the left. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. click Detail Component. and press ENTER. and press ENTER.rfa. 65 On the Options Bar. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. 58 In the Type Selector. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and right edges of the door panel region. click Load. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. and click Open. click Detail Component. click Detail Lines. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . select Wide Lines. click Load. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. 74 Select the expansion bolt. click Training Files. use the images as a guide. 76 In the Type Selector. 71 On the Options Bar.rfa.70 On the Design Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail.

87 Click Modify. (Mirror). and on the Edit toolbar. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Detail Lines.78 On the Design Bar. 79 In the Type Selector. 84 On the Design Bar. 82 Select the rectangle. 85 On the Options Bar. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. click Detail Lines. 80 On the Options Bar. click . select Thin Lines. click . 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown.

drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. click Detail Lines.88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. and on the Edit toolbar. 92 Select the line. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 90 In the Type Selector. select Medium Lines. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . click (Mirror). 89 On the Design Bar. as shown.

102 In the Type Selector. and press ENTER. select M_Break Line. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click to place the arc as shown. click . 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 101 On the Design Bar. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. 103 Add two break lines as shown. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. enter 3mm. click Detail Lines.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. 95 On the Design Bar. 99 Click Modify. 97 On the Options Bar. click Detail Component. select the length dimension.

5mm Arial. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. and click Modify. click Dimension. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. drag the text for the smaller dimension. using the Drag Text grip. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. 110 Select the dimension line. 107 On the Design Bar. 105 In the drawing area. 106 Click to place the dimension. click Dimension. 108 In the Type Selector. and click Modify. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown.

120 In the Dimension Text dialog. and then click the dimension text.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. select Replace With Text. enter See Schedule. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . and click the dimension text. select Replace With Text. under Dimension Value. for Below. 114 Click OK.5mmArial. click Dimension. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. 112 In the Dimension Text dialog. under Dimension Value. and enter 175 mm @ Type A.2. 118 Select Modify to end the command. 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. and enter Varies. 113 Under Text Fields. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

127 Enter Gyp. 126 In the drawing area. Board. click Text. select the gypsum board region on the left. Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 125 In the Options Bar. Enter 225 mm @ Type C. 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. click (Add Right Arc Leader). 128 Select the note.121 Click OK. click to create an arced leader. and click to place the text. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . and click Modify. 123 Click OK. 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown.

click Modify to end the command. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 132 Save the file.131 On the Design Bar.

you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. and double-click East. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click Training Files. 339 . Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets.Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. Creating a Note Block In this exercise.

click Symbol. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project.rfa. type 1. for Number of Leaders. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Hexagon. 8 Select the keynote. 5 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. click Modify. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . 7 On the Design Bar.

on the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). for Text. 12 On the Edit toolbar. Creating a Note Block | 341 .9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. 13 Select the tag. click (Copy). 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click above the tag to place the copy. under Identity Data. and click OK. type Seal existing doors and insulate.

18 Using the same method. click Copy. on the Edit toolbar.14 With the copy selected. type B. and on the Options Bar. (Mirror). Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 16 For Tag. 19 With the tag selected. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. 15 For Text. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 17 Click OK. and click. type Repair existing door surround. click (Element Properties). on the Options Bar. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays.

Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. 22 Optionally. Remove all existing windows. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation.21 On the Design Bar. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Clean exterior brick wall. Tuckpoint as required. using the table as a reference. Repair as required. click Modify. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Repair existing door surround. and moving counter-clockwise. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 .

select Tag. 26 Click OK. for Sort by. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. for Note block name. under Available fields. 27 In the column header (text). and click Add. Select Text. for the value. select Tag. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. and drag it to the sheet. and select Bold. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. and click Add. and double-click A103 . On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 28 In the Project Browser. format. and for Alignment. select Exterior Construction Notes. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. verify that Arial is selected. type Description. type 6 mm. On the Formatting tab. type Mark. expand Sheets (all). 24 In the New Note Block dialog. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab.Elevations. type Exterior Construction Notes. Clean cut and repair wall as required. for Header text. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. and click OK. expand Schedules/Quantities. 29 In the Project Browser. for Heading. select Center. On the Appearance tab. Create.

Using Drawing Lists In this lesson.31 On the Design Bar. under Sheets (all).Title Sheet. double-click T . 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. Using Drawing Lists | 345 . click Modify.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 32 Zoom in to see the note block.rvt.

Title Sheet. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. The drawing list displays. select Sheet Number. ■ 4 Click OK. and drag it to the sheet. and click Add. for Filter by. select Sheet Number. On the Filter tab. expand Schedules/Quantities. in the second field. in the first field. under Sheets (all). for Sort by. Select Sheet Name. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . under Available fields. select does not equal. 5 In the list title field. and click Add. double-click T . 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. and in the third field. 6 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Project Browser. type T. select Sheet Index. select Sheet Number.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab.

door frame schedule. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. windows. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. 11 Save the file. Training File Using Legends | 347 . For the text. On construction documents. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. doors. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. Finally. On construction documents. and so on). The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends.9 On the Design Bar. and door frames. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. click Modify.

Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Edit/New.rvt. and click OK twice. and click OK. for Name. 10 For Text Size. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . click Duplicate. click Symbol. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and click OK. 9 For Text Font.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. 6 On the Options Bar. click Text.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . select Arial.Open Level Head . 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. type 3mm. for Name. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. you create a text type with the necessary size. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. type Typical Symbol Legend. click . 2 In the New Legend View dialog.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. type Legend Text.

expand Legends. and double-click A101 . expand Sheets (all). 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 . 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. and for Leader. 16 In the Project Browser. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. click Typical Symbol Legend.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. 14 Working from the top down.Site Plan/Floor Plan. and click to place it. verify that is selected. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected.

click Modify. double-click A102 .17 In the Type Selector. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 21 In the Type Selector. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 19 In the Project Browser. under Sheets.Unit 18. 23 Save the file. 22 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. 18 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required.

for Name. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. For Host length. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. For View. 3 For Scale. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. select Section. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. type 4th Floor Wall Types. and press ENTER. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . select Medium for Detail Level.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. 5 On the View Control Bar.rvt. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. select 1 : 50. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Legend Component. and click OK. type 900 mm.

and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. click Text. 10 Select the second wall. 12 In the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click to add text without a leader. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. 13 On the Options Bar. click Modify. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. for Family. for Leader. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.9 On the Design Bar.

The text note with leader is added to the legend. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 23 In the Project Browser. and click New Sheet.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. select Level 4. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. Creating a Component Legend | 353 . under Floor Plans. 19 Type the following text. right-click Sheets (all). 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. click to add text with a single-segment leader. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. and drag it to the new sheet. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.

double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 29 In the Project Browser. select 4th Floor Wall Types. click Modify to end the command. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. double-click Level 4. The open drawings are both visible. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. under Floor Plans. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. drag it onto the sheet. under Legends. 26 On the Design Bar.25 In the Project Browser. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet.

The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. 34 Select the patio divider wall. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. select the Wall Type 2 component. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. 35 On the View Control Bar. select Detail Level: Medium.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. click (Match Type). Creating a Component Legend | 355 . 33 In the floor plan view. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view.

356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click 37 Save the file. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. You can create a sequence of revisions. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. In this exercise. Using the table. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. under Floor Plans. These changes can be due to owner requests. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. or changes in building material availability.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. contractor inquiries. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions.36 Optionally. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. double-click Level 4.

Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. 5 For Description. When you use this option. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . type a date. if the active revision is number 1. For example. yet as concise as possible. for Numbering. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. In most instances. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. verify that Per Project is selected. If you select Per Sheet. If Visible is not selected. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. In general. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. When Issued is selected. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. the revision is locked and issued to the field. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. 7 Under Show.

Revision clouds have read-only properties. click (Move). double-click Level 4. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. click Modify. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 9 Save the file. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. 4 On the Edit toolbar. under Floor Plans. including revision number and revision date.8 Click OK. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider.rvt. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. you make changes to the project floor plan. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. 3 Select the divider. 6 On the Design Bar. 5 Select the divider. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. move the cursor up.

select Snaps Off. 11 On the Design Bar. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. In the Snaps dialog. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. 8 In the drawing area. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. click Finish Sketch. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 . and click OK. click Revision Cloud. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. click near the partition you moved.

13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select 6.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. you load a revision tag into the project. 17 Save the file. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 16 Click OK. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. for Line Weight. click the Annotation Objects tab. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. 14 In the Object Styles dialog.

the cloud is tagged as number 1. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. select Leader. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. Because you chose to number by project.rfa. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. and because the revision is the first in the project. Working with Revisions In this exercise. 12 Save the file. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. click Training Files. 6 Click Load. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. scroll down to Revision Clouds. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 . The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. you create additional revisions in the revision table. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. You then issue a revision. click Tags. you need to add one. click OK. under Floor Plans. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. 10 In the drawing area. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Tags dialog.rvt. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 8 In the Tags dialog. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. 11 Click to place the tag. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. click Tag ➤ By Category. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. double-click Level 4.

View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. and click OK. You can continue to add revisions. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. 9 Click OK. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Add. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. and enter a date. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . type Modify Paving Area.rvt. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. select Issued. under Sheets. 7 For Description. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions.Unnamed. and enter a date for the revision. with the description Relocate Door. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. 8 Add another revision row. you can no longer modify it. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. double-click A107 . You do this by issuing the revision. NOTE After you issue a revision. you prevent further changes to the revision.

apply Seq. for Revision.Unnamed. 17 Using the same method learned previously. 15 On the Options Bar. under Sheets (all). click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. select Tag ➤ By Category.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. Working with Revisions | 363 . 11 On the Drafting tab. in the drawing area.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. under Floor Plans. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. select Seq. select the revision cloud. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. 13 Click Finish Sketch. double-click Level 4. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. 20 On the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. 3 . double-click A107 . 12 In the drawing area. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. select Revision Cloud. 2 .Modify Paving Area. 19 To add tags. click to add a revision clouds.

delete the first 3 characters. for Sequence. select Alphabetic. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. and rotation) to the revision schedule. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. For each revision. 25 Click OK twice. you edit the titleblock family. select the titleblock. Click Options. beginning with "D". height. clear Issued. You do this so that the revision can be changed. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . for Numbering. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 26 In the drawing area. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog.

and click Properties. click Edit Family. and drag it above the schedule area. 28 In the alert dialog. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. Select Outline. click Modify. click Yes. click Edit. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. click Yes. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. click Load into Projects. for Appearance. under Other. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. Clear Blank row before data. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules.27 On the Options Bar. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. Select Grid lines. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 On the Design Bar. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. 33 Select the schedule header. right-click Revision Schedule. Working with Revisions | 365 . select Bottom-up. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. and press DELETE. for Build Schedule.

and click Properties. open the titleblock family for editing. select 90° Counterclockwise. select the revision schedule. select User defined.. for Rotation on Sheet. for Height. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. When the height property is variable. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and on the Options Bar.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. enter Rev. click Edit. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. With a user-defined height. for Heading. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. for Formatting. 46 Click OK twice. 45 On the Appearance tab. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. under Other. right-click Revision Schedule. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. 40 Select the revision schedule header.

51 Save the file. you learn to import information (such as images. click Load into Projects.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Importing from Other Applications | 367 . click Yes. 50 In the Reload Family dialog. text. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project.

double-click T . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.Importing Image Files In this exercise. double-click T . Importing Text Documents In this exercise. 5 On the Design Bar.Title Sheet. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Text. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser.Title Sheet. click Training Files. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. under Sheets. click to add text without a leader. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. and place it on a sheet. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. for Leader. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. click Modify.JPG. under Sheets. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt.

Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 . 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. 9 On the Design Bar. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. with the new text box still selected. 6 Select the text. click Modify. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.doc text file in another window. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. 11 Save the file. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project.

click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format.rvt. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. for Name. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. click Modify. type Fixture Schedule. 3 In Microsoft Excel. 10 On the Design Bar. for File name. This step has been completed for you. 12 Save the file.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.mdi. 5 Click OK. This process may vary from system to system. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. and click Save. 1 In the Project Browser. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. click File menu ➤ Print. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.JPG. and saved as Fixture Schedule. double-click A102 . and open Common\Fixture Schedule. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. select the document writer. click Training Files. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet.Unit 18. click Desktop. 4 Under Printer.JPG.xls. This exercise demonstrates a common method. under Sheets.

To effectively document this project. as well as a large lab building. 371 . or footprint. The large floor plan. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. you break up the plan into sections. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. called dependent views.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .

you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 .Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

under Floor Plans. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. 6 In the drawing area.Aviary. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. 5 Click in the drawing area. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . under Level 2. 2 In the Project Browser.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 . The dependent view opens. and click OK. 4 In the Rename View dialog. for Name. 3 In the Project Browser. and the model crop is the interior crop region. right-click Dependent on Level 2. right-click Level 2. select the crop region. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. and click Rename. click Zoom To Fit. double-click Level 2. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region.

9 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region).8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 .

and on the Zoom flyout. right-click Dependent on Level 2. right-click Level 2. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. enter Level 2 . and click OK. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). click Zoom To Fit. 12 In the Project Browser. 15 Select the crop region. 14 Click in the drawing area. and on the Zoom flyout. 11 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit. 13 In the Rename View dialog.Labs.10 Click in the drawing area. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and click Rename. for Name.

Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and on the Zoom flyout. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. click (Hide Crop Region). (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. 20 Click in the drawing area. click Matchline. 19 On the View Control Bar. click Zoom To Fit. 18 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 .The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. double-click Level 2.

click Finish Sketch. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. Click above the left corner of the lab building. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary.■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. 24 On the Design Bar. and click. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .

for Name. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 . 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select 9. and click Rename. click the Annotation Objects tab. enter Level 2 Aviary. click Level 2 . expand Sheets. under Floor Plans. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 33 In the Project Browser. and click OK.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. right-click A101 . 27 Under Matchline. for Line Weight. and drag it onto the sheet. 31 In the Project Browser. select Double Dash. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. and click OK. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. 28 For Line Pattern.Aviary.Unnamed.

380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .35 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. click View Reference.Aviary is selected.Labs dependent view on the sheet. for Target view. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . and place the Level 2 . under Floor Plans. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. double-click Level 2. 39 On the Options Bar.

45 On the Zoom flyout. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . click Modify. for Target view. 44 On the Design Bar. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. 41 On the Options Bar. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . click Zoom To Fit.Labs.

right-click. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. under Floor Plans. click the far right control. 49 If.46 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2 . 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Aviary. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. click (Show Crop Region). select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. after modifying the annotation crop region. 47 On the View Control Bar. 48 Select the crop region.

you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. 55 On the Zoom flyout. and click Apply Dependent Views. but are not placed on sheets. 53 In the Select Views dialog. 52 In the Project Browser. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . right-click Level 2. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). click Zoom To Fit. and click OK.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. expand Level 1. 54 In the Project Browser. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 51 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. select all views in the list.

rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. right-click South Elevation. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . click Training Files. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and double-click South Elevation.57 On the Zoom flyout. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The matchline is already placed in the view. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. 2 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views.

10 In the Rename View dialog.The dependent view opens. and drag it toward the center of the view. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . 11 Select the crop region. 3 In the Project Browser. and click OK. cropping the view to the aviary. 9 In the Project Browser. expand South Elevation. click (Hide Crop Region).Left. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. right-click South Elevation. cropping the view to the lab building.Right. and click Rename. enter South Elevation . for Name. 7 On the View Control Bar. enter South Elevation . right-click Dependent on South Elevation. and click Rename. select the Crop Region. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 5 In the drawing area. and click OK. for Name. 4 In the Rename View dialog. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. 8 In the Project Browser. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Creating a Perspective View on page 403. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Perspective View | 403 . you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render.15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise.

click Camera. 404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. on the View tab of the Design Bar. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. The perspective view displays.

If the camera is not shown in the view. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. Depending on camera placement. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. in the Project Browser. With the camera shown. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. and click Show Camera. as necessary. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. double-click Site. as shown. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser.3 Zoom out. and adjust the field of vision. Creating a Perspective View | 405 . right-click 3D View 1. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. and select the crop boundary. under Floor Plans.

and click OK. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 7 In the Rename View dialog. 8 In the Project Browser.Day to open the view. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. 10 Save the file.Day. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. enter Exterior . under 3D Views. and click Rename. right-click 3D View 1. double-click Exterior . 11 Proceed to the next exercise.6 In the Project Browser.

and render a daytime view of the exterior. modify render settings. under 3D Views.Day. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 . You then duplicate the view. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click Exterior .rvt.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise.

see Re-orienting the Project on page 447. 3pm. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. You adjust cloud settings as required. 7 In the Rendering dialog. under Lighting.Santa Monica. NOTE If a background image is required. 6 Click OK twice. select Spring Equinox. 8 Under Quality. for New. 5 In the Rename dialog. enter Spring Equinox . export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. for Setting. and click Render. You create a location and time for the rendering. under Background. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. select Medium. for Sun. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Rename. select Edit/New. select Sky: Cloudy. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 3 In the Rendering dialog. In this case. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings.

Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . Click Save. For Files of type. After the image is rendered. 13 Close the Rendering dialog. click Desktop. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. click Show the rendering.png). click Export. click Show the model. select Portable Network Graphics (*. 10 In the Rendering dialog. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference.9 In the Rendering dialog.

you duplicate the view and change the settings.Night. under Lighting. under Ungrouped Lights. under 3D Views.Day. 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click New.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . for Name. press and hold SHIFT. for Scheme.Flat Round : 60W . select Exterior: Artificial only. right-click Exterior .Exterior . and click OK. select the first light. under Ungrouped Lights. and click Artificial Lights. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog.120V. verify that Pool Lights is selected.120V through 35 :Sconce Light .Flat Round : 60W . 21 In the Light Groups dialog.Flat Round : 60W . under Group Options. enter Pool House Lights. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group.Night view open. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. click New. To create a similar view using different rendering settings.Night. and click OK. 24 In the New Light Group dialog. 19 In the New Light Group dialog. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. 27 In the Rendering dialog. and click Move to Group. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . dialog. 16 With the Exterior . 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog.Day view to Exterior . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . click OK. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. and click OK. To select a sequential list.120V to the Pool Lights group. under Group Options.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. click Dialog). 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . click Render. 25 Using the same method. on the View Control Bar.Flat Round : 60W . and select the last light. add 30 :Sconce Light . enter Pool Lights. 22 Using the same method. for Name.

you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. enter 4. click Show the model. In this example. and click OK. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. you change the brightness of the exposure. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. Rendering an Interior View on page 411. After the image is rendered. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. for Exposure Value. under Image. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. 32 Save the file. 30 In the Rendering dialog. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. Rendering an Interior View | 411 . 31 Close the Rendering dialog. click Adjust Exposure.

RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. render the views. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house.rvt. Adding RPC People In this exercise. define the perspective view and rendering settings. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. c_Pool_House_in_progress. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and finally. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise.

the person’s line of sight. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. 6 Select the figure. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. and on the Edit toolbar. double-click Level 1. 4 In the Type Selector. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. ■ (Rotate). under Floor Plans. and place the component inside the pool house. click Component. select RPC Female : YinYin. Adding RPC People | 413 . Exact placement is not important.

11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. By default. for Render Appearance Properties. select Cast Reflections. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. click Edit. 14 Save the file. click Modify. you can enable this option. under Identity Data. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. In order to see the figure’s reflection. 13 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. 12 Click OK 3 times. click (Element Properties). under Parameters. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point.rvt. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 . Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. click Camera.15 Proceed to the next exercise. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. c_Pool_House_in_progress.

under 3D Views. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. select Section Box.The perspective view displays. under Extents. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . right-click 3D View 1. 4 In the Project Browser. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. and click Properties. and click OK.

under Elevations (Building Elevations).7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. In order to accurately adjust the section box. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. in addition to the 3D view. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Project Browser. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. double-click Level 1. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 . select the section box. double-click South. 11 In the 3D view. under Floor Plans.

14 In the 3D view. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .12 In the floor plan view. size the box as shown. select the section box. 13 In the South Elevation view. size the box as shown. right-click.

you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. 18 Proceed to the next exercise.15 Maximize the 3D view. doors that contain windows or glass. and curtain walls. 17 Save the file. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. To create a daytime view. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. and render the interior view. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows.

under Lighting. You can specify a lower quality. 8 In the Rendering dialog. select Draft. you turn them off for this scene. 4 In the Rendering dialog. click (Show Rendering Dialog). and click OK. for Setting. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. 5 Click Artificial Lights. click Render. After these settings are established. clear Pool Lights. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. and click Rename.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Interior: Artificial only. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 7 Under Quality. and click OK.Night. right-click 3D View 1. for Scheme. enter Interior . and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. 3 On the View Control Bar.rvt. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. c_Pool_House_in_progress. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 2 In the Rename View dialog. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight.

13 In the Rendering dialog. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar.Santa Monica. but the space will receive standard daylighting. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. 17 In the Rendering dialog. For more information on daylight portals. select Region. Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 . and click Render. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. In this case. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. select Curtain Walls. for Sun. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. 3pm. for Scheme. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. and click OK. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. select Spring Equinox . 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. (Show Rendering Dialog). the daylight portals can be turned on. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . you must create a custom setting. click 14 For Setting. The preset schemes are read-only. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes.Night. You create a view for the interior during the day. right-click Interior . select Interior: Sun only. for Daylight Portal Options. For sunlit interiors. select Edit.Day. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view.9 Close the Rendering dialog. in order to turn on daylight portals. click Copy To Custom. By default they are turned off.

20 In the Rendering dialog. (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .18 In the Rendering dialog. select the column on the right. click Show the model. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. enter 10. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. under Image. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. click Properties). and on the Options Bar. enter 1. click Adjust Exposure. For Saturation. In the next steps. and close the Rendering dialog. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. Click OK.

24 In the Materials dialog. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. click OK. enter 5''. select the crop boundary. clear Region. under Output Settings.22 In the Element Properties dialog. You change the varnish setting. enter 90. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. and click OK. Click OK.6. for Setting. select Based on wood grain. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. select Scale (locked proportions). select Unfinished. and on the Options Bar. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. select High. 30 In the drawing area. and click Render. add a bump map to create texture. select Printer. 32 In the Rendering dialog. For Width. For Bump. 23 With the column still selected. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. 29 In the Rendering dialog. 26 Click Update Preview. select Wood. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . As size and DPI are increased. for Resolution. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. For Rotate. 28 In the Rendering dialog. click the dimensions for Size. click (Show Rendering Dialog). the render time increases significantly. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. For Amount.

and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. or section view. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. independent of the Revit Architecture software. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view.The rendered image displays. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. but you can also define it in a 3D. In a plan view. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. elevation. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. The walkthrough path is a spline. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. Usually. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output.

expand Views (all). verify that Perspective is selected. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. proceeds through the dining room. In the left pane of the Open dialog.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. on the Options Bar.rvt. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. and ends in the far corner of the living room. expand Floor Plans. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. click Settings ➤ Project Units. click Training Files. right-click in the Design Bar. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. If you prefer to use metric values. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and open Common\c_Townhouse. and double-click 1st Floor. click Walkthrough. Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. and click the tab in the context menu. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. and change unit formats as desired.

Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. click Finish. on the Options Bar. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. and double-click Walkthrough 1. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown.

verify that Field of view is selected. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . 12 On the View menu. 14 Click .8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. 13 On the Options Bar. click Edit Walkthrough. and for Height. 11 Under Change. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. enter 16''. for Frame. and click OK. enter 9''. select the crop boundary. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. click the dimensions for Size. 16 On the Options Bar. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. enter 1. and select the crop boundary. 17 Click . If it is not. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. on the Options Bar. and click OK. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. for Width.

NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428.rvt. c_Townhouse. double-click 1st Floor. under Floor Plans. clear Far Clip Active. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. press ESC. 2 On the Options Bar. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. click Edit Walkthrough. proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.The walkthrough plays. under Extents. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. and click OK. 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar.

Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 .5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). for Controls. select Path. and drag it to the location shown. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. 7 Click the third key frame position. You can move any camera target or key frame position. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. 6 On the Options Bar. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown.

you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. 9 To play the walkthrough. It produces files that are larger than compressed files.rvt. enter 15. The walkthrough is recorded. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. for Model Graphics Style. and save the exercise file with a unique name. under Output Length. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . reducing the size of the image. shading. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. shading with edges. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. for Compressor. 8 If you want to save this exercise. .Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. click File menu ➤ Save As. or rendering. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. double-click Walkthrough 1. and click Save. When you export the walkthrough. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. click Edit Walkthrough. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Walkthroughs. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the Options Bar. select <Shading>. specifying the number of frames. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. If you are unsure of what option to use. for Frames/sec. and click OK. 3 Under Format. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. c_Townhouse. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. hidden line. and click OK.

Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. More specifically. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. 431 . you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. In this tutorial. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building.

you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. (SteeringWheels). 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. expand Floor Plans. as shown. 4 On the View toolbar.Courtyard View In this exercise. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. click shown. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and double-click 01 Entry. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. click Camera. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view. as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .Creating a Solar Study . A 3D view is created. expand Views (all).

and save the exercise file with a unique name. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry. 7 In the Project Browser. click Section. as shown. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view.5 On the Design Bar.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. right-click 3D View 1. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. expand 3D Views.Courtyard View. 3 On the Design Bar. 6 Click the view boundary to select it. and click OK. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433. enter Solar Study . click Save As. and click Rename. you create a section cutaway view. 8 In the Rename View dialog. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . if necessary. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. 9 On the File menu. click Modify. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. 10 Proceed to the next exercise.

and click OK. 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . right-click Section 1. click Modify. (SteeringWheels).5 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. and click Rename. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 11 On the SteeringWheel. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. click 10 On the View toolbar. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. as shown. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 6 To view the section. click . 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. click Modify. double-click the section head. 7 In the Project Browser. expand Sections. 8 In the Rename View dialog.

click Callout. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. then select Medium. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. under Floor Plans. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. and click OK. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. do not display many elements in 3D. and click OK. such as floor plans and ceiling plans.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. you create a plan cutaway view. right-click {3D}. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. In some cases. 5 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Rename View dialog. including the house. On the Annotation Categories tab. as shown. 18 On the File menu. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.14 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. clear Section Boxes. Typical plan views. and click OK. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. click Save. under 3D Views. click . then Fine. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. under Floor Plans. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. 17 To hide the section box. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. double-click 01 Entry. 4 In the Project Browser. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. 6 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. 16 On the View Control Bar.

436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category.8 On the View toolbar. click Modify. 9 On the SteeringWheel. and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 16 On the View Control Bar. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. as shown. as shown. 11 On the Design Bar. so you can see into the building from the top. click (SteeringWheels). 15 Select the Roof. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building.

click Save. right-click {3D}. 21 On the File menu. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. under 3D Views. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. 20 On the View Control Bar. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. 18 In the Project Browser.17 On the View Control Bar. 19 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. and click Rename. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study .

Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. 2 On the View Control Bar. 3 Select Cast Shadows. you specify the location. 10 Under Place. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click click OK. For the Multi-Day solar study. 4 For Sun Position. and click Duplicate. expand 3D Views. select Los Angeles. Los Angeles. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . single-day. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. you specify the location. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. . Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. date range. For the Single-Day solar study.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. Click the Single-Day tab. For this study. or multi-day solar study. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. USA is selected. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. click . leave the slider at 50. and time range. MA. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . USA. enter Summer Solstice. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. date. You can create a still. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. CA. and click OK.Boston. for City. 9 In the Name dialog. and time. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation.Creating Solar Studies . as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. expand Views (all). click .

click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. click OK. 2008. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. confirm that Summer Solstice. on the Single-Day tab. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. enter 20 and press ENTER. Clear Ground Plane at Level. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. click Save. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 . 2 On the View Control Bar. Under Frame. 14 In this case. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. 6 On the View Control Bar. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. click OK. and click OK. for Sun Position. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. for Date. ■ For Time Interval. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . click . 20 Proceed to the next exercise. For Time Range. and click OK. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 7 On the Options Bar. 19 On the File menu.Courtyard View is currently displayed. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. Los Angeles. select December 22. and click Duplicate. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. enter 10 and press ENTER. click . 8 On the Options Bar. under Frame.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. enter Winter Solstice. select Winter Solstice. 16 In the Name dialog. Los Angeles is selected. Los Angeles. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. select June 22. 2008. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson.■ To display the next key frame. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. on the Single-Day tab. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. 13 On the View Control Bar. The solar study animation plays. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. under Floor Plans. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. approximately as shown. 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click . showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. click OK. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. click . 14 On the Options Bar. click To play the animation from start to finish. Los Angeles. . Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click .rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. for Sun Position. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. . click To display the next sequential frame. and click OK. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. . You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Text. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. select Summer Solstice.

5 In the Project Browser. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. click . and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. as shown. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. click Lines. 8 For Sun Position.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. as shown. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. On the Options Bar. 6 On the View Control Bar. approximately as shown. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 . 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. expand 3D Views. click . Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. Click and enter Dining.

Los Angeles. verify that the value is set to 15. select Section Boxes. 14 Click outside of the section box. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. On the Annotation Categories tab. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 12 In the drawing area. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Section Boxes. under Output Length. and click OK. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. 15 To hide the section box. on the Single-Day tab. select the section box. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. if necessary. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. 11 To display the section box. and enter 5 to 50. and click OK.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. On the Annotation Categories tab. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Summer Solstice. select Frame Range. and click OK. ■ For Frames per second. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. as shown. click OK.

Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. select Frame Range. and click OK. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. on the Single-Day tab. To maintain the proportions of the frame. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. select Winter Solstice. click OK. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. and click OK. verify that the value is set to 15. for Model Graphics Style. verify that Hidden Line is selected. select AVI Files. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. 2 On the View Control Bar. you open each image.Los Angeles. Click OK. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . for Model Graphics Style. verify that Hidden Line is selected. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. or frame. of the animation separately. For Dimensions. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. for Compressor. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. 3 For Sun Position.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. click . ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. For File Name. For Files of Type. To view the animation. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed.■ ■ Under Format. enter 450 in the first field (width). Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. and enter 5 to 10. For Frames per second. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Los Angeles. under Output Length. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . Under Format.

or any single-frame format. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . For File name. TIFF. For Files of Type. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. select PNG. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. In this example. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . Click OK. such as JPEG. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. or GIF. 8 Click Save. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson.■ For Dimensions. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. click the Desktop icon.Los Angeles. click Save. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. depending on the Frame Range. enter 450 in the first field (width). it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. under 3D Views. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. BMP. as shown: 9 On the File menu. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG.

NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen.2 Select the section box in the drawing area. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. as shown. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 .

MA. click the Multi-Day tab. for File name enter 2pm . specify 2:00 pm. select One week. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 12 In the Name dialog.Week Interval. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click Duplicate. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. For Time. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . For Time Interval. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On.Los Angeles . Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. clear Section Boxes. On the Annotation Categories tab. and on the View Control Bar. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. USA. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . click OK. 5 Select the roof. for Sun Position. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. and click OK. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. and click OK. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 8 On the View Control Bar. and click OK.Boston.

Re-orienting the Project | 447 . Mirroring the Project In this exercise. click OK. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. model views. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. under Floor Plans. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). and annotations in non-drafting views. and click OK. double-click 01 Entry. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis.West or North . 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. such as East . you mirror all model elements. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop.South. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. In the Length/Format dialog. When you mirror a project. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 17 On the View Control Bar. for Compressor. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. for File Name. and click Save. Click the Desktop icon.

you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. 2 In the drawing area. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. select East . 4 In the Mirror Project dialog. 5 In the warning dialog. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. under 3D Views. click OK.West axis. For additional information. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser. The project is mirrored along the East .3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Then.West. and click OK. In this exercise. 6 On the Standard toolbar. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. right-click. select the roof.

click . Orienting to True North | 449 . you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. on the Still tab. 10 Under Date and Time. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click Apply. and select Winter Solstice. specify 11:00 AM for time. and click OK. click . and click OK. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. and click OK. 11 For Sun Position. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. 8 For Sun Position. change the time back to 12:00 PM. select Summer Solstice. 5 For Sun Position. click . 12 Under Date and Time.3 On the View Control Bar. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For example. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. click the Still tab.

Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. click OK. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. and click OK. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. 18 In the Project Browser. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. 14 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. right click 01 Entry. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and select Winter Solstice. select True North. and click Properties. click . double-click 01 Entry. 15 For Sun Position.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 19 In the Project Browser. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. When a project is started. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click the Still tab. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). This process establishes the view setting to True North. click OK. and click OK. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. under Floor Plans. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. the view settings must be set for True North. for Orientation.

click above the end of the magenta line representing True North.■ To establish the True North direction. The floor plan rotates in the view. as shown. click toward the top of the screen. Orienting to True North | 451 . ■ To establish the new direction of True North.

select True North Orientation. 32 On the View Control Bar. right-click 01 Entry. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. right-click. for Orientation. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. and click Element Properties. 28 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 27 In the Rename View dialog. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. for Orientation. and click Properties. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.23 In the Project Browser. right-click 01 Entry. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. select Summer Solstice. select Project North. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. click . 33 For Sun Position. and click OK. 25 In the Project Browser. click the Still tab. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. and click Apply. right-click. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. select True North. enter True North Orientation.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. and click OK. For Files of Type. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. click the Single-Day tab. and click OK. Los Angeles. click OK. under Format. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. Orienting to True North | 453 . The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. for Compressor. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. enter 600 in the first field. click the Desktop icon. for Dimensions. Click Save. For File Name. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. Click OK. In the Length/Format dialog. click Summer Solstice. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. verify that AVI Files is selected.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

and click OK. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. capturing it. In this exercise. Rendered views do not have this limitation. Under Lighting. under Quality. under 3D Views. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. In the Name dialog. For Sun. under Settings. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. 3 On the View Control Bar. and 2:00 PM. 2 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select 12/22.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. select Winter Solstice. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. and exporting it as a JPEG image. click Render. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. select Edit/New. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. for Setting. and click Duplicate. Since a rendered image is temporary. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . for Scheme. and click OK. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. (Show Rendering Dialog). 1 In the Project Browser. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. select Medium. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. select Interior: Sun only.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. for Date and Time. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles.

click Export. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. For Files of type. enter living area_winter solstice. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save.6 In the Rendering dialog. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. verify that JPEG Files is selected. and click OK. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. Rendering an Interior View | 455 . click Desktop. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. and click Save. click Save to Project.

456 .

and section boxes. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. you explore the stylistic approach. you can choose between realism and stylistics. however. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. sections. length. elevations. or the client. advanced model graphics. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. They include rendering. type. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. Using the pre-built building model. Other tools in the software.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. In this tutorial. and details. a consultant. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. linework. 457 . In this series of exercises. an outside reviewer. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. For the realistic approach. Co-house. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. Whether the audience is the general contractor. When organizing presentation graphics.

To fit the floor plan into the analytique. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. 458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you create a copy of the plan. you create a presentation floor plan.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast.

3 In the Rename View dialog. Cnst. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 . click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. under Floor Plans. and click OK. exit the menu. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Project Browser. click in the drawing area.rvt. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. right-click 2nd Flr. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. Cnst. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. No annotations display in the view. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. and clear DOWN Text. and Up Arrow. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. Down Arrow. UP Text. expand the Stairs category. click the Scale control and select 1:100. 8 Click OK.rvt. 11 In the Save As directory. dimensions. click the Annotation Categories tab. sections. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . This turns off the visibility of all tags. elevations. and other annotations in this view. this represents the view getting smaller. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. and click Save. 7 Under Visibility.5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.

click the Place tab. Cnst. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. on the Still tab.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click (Shadows Off). specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. modify. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Within a project. for Date and Time. 2 On the View Control Bar. you can select any city. MA. 6 Under Settings. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. and click OK. 1:00 PM. click . however. 9 For City. At that place. the darker the shadows. specify 35. 3 On the View Control Bar. 12 Click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics. you can create. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. If you select a different city. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. specify 10/27. select Cast Shadows. Time and Place. select By Date. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. The higher the number. double-click it in the Project Browser. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. 7 For Place. select Boston. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . select Sun and Shadow Settings. and select 1st Flr. ■ For Contrast.rvt. click . Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click OK. For Sun Position. NOTE For this step.

and click Advanced Model Graphics. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. under Settings. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. for Sun Position. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . . This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. clear Ground Plane at Level. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click OK. click (Shadows On). This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save.Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK.

3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 . click Add View. 6 On the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. TIP If the View tab is not available. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. and click OK. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 4 In the Views dialog. select Arch Portrait. and click to place it. click Modify.Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The viewport displays at the cursor. and click View. click Sheet. right-click the Design Bar. and notice the view title.

for Show Title. and click OK. click Edit/New. and click Activate View. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. 9 On the Options Bar. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. click . 13 In the Type Properties dialog. The viewport no longer displays a view title. To accomplish this. For this analytique. and click OK. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. under Graphics. enter Presentation. select No. 12 In the Name dialog. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click OK.

select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. When you finish drawing the chain. click . 22 On the Design Bar. select Invisible lines. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. 18 On the Options Bar. and the boundary of the region. click . and select Chain. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. click Region Properties. fill properties. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. click Filled Region. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. 17 In the Type Selector. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. If necessary. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown.

click Duplicate. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. enter Solid Black. under Identity Data. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. under Name. 30 On the Design Bar. and click View Properties. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. enter Presentation. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. 25 In the Name dialog. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. select Solid fill. under Graphics. click . for Sheet Name. scroll down. and click OK. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black.24 In the Type Properties dialog. for Fill Pattern. click OK. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. and click OK. and click Deactivate View.

Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. right-click South.rvt. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 . you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser.

scroll up. and click OK. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Settings. and click Rename. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. 9 Click OK. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. under Visibility. and click Advanced Model Graphics. under Visibility. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and clear Elevation Swing. 18 For Time. right-click Copy of South. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. select Cast Shadows. click Override. click Duplicate. click (Shadows Off). specify 35. select By Date.2 In the Project Browser. 13 For Contrast. By changing the angle of the sun. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. expand the Doors category. and click OK. click in the Walls row. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. click . 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. exit the menu. click OK. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 16 In the Name dialog. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . specify 2:30 PM. and click OK. under Elevations. enter Presentation South Elevation. 12 Under Shadow. clear Visible. click in the drawing area. Time and Place. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 14 For Sun Position. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. 11 On the View Control Bar. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. under Pattern Overrides. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. on the Model Categories tab.

4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Add View. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all).20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. 3 In the Views dialog. double-click A105 .rvt. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. and click Add View to Sheet.Presentation.

5 In the Type Selector. The view title no longer displays. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .The viewport displays a view title. select Viewport : Presentation.

you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. click Modify. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 . 7 On the Design Bar. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson.

and use the flip arrows if necessary.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. click Section. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . for Scale. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. select 1: 100. Cnst. double-click 1st Flr. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Floor Plans. 4 Add the section shown below.

Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . as shown.Section 2 is added to the building model. click Callout. for Scale. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. select 1 : 100. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. To accomplish this. this view needs to be rotated 180°. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. and double-click Section 2. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Options Bar. To fit correctly in the analytique. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Sections (Callout 1).

clear Visible. and click OK. 11 In the Rename View dialog. 15 Under Visibility. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. right-click Callout of Section 2. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). 12 In the Project Browser. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click the Model Categories tab. 17 Under Visibility. double-click Presentation Section 2. 10 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. click Override. click Modify. and click OK. under Sections (Callout 1). and clear Elevation Swing. scroll up. under Pattern Overrides. expand the Doors category. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. click in the Walls row. enter Presentation Section 2. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view.

click The crop regions no longer display. The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. When you select the crop region. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476.■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. 20 Click OK. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. (Hide Crop Region). The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 . 22 On the View Control Bar.

Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows. 2 On the View Control Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click . TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. click Duplicate. and click Advanced Model Graphics.rvt. in the Project Browser. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click OK. In the steps that follow. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For Contrast. ■ For Sun Position. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. Click Apply. under Sections (Callout 1). 6 In the Name dialog. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. 3 On the View Control Bar. specify 35. In addition. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. specify the following: Under Shadow. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). The shadows do not offer much contrast. double-click Presentation Section 2.

and click Advanced Model Graphics. specify 135°. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478. click OK. For Altitude.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE The line style. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. was added to this training file for training purposes. for Silhouette style. select Directly. select Silhouette Edges. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click (Shadows On). Select Relative to View. and click OK. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. specify 70°. For Azimuth. Silhouette Edges. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar.

double-click A105 .Presentation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°. and click to place the selected view. under Sheets (all). m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 3 In the Views dialog.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Add View. select Section: Presentation Section 2. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 9 On the Edit toolbar. In the steps that follow. double-click Section 2. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. To rotate an object. The section needs to be rotated 180°. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . under Sections (Callout 1). click (Rotate).5 In the Type Selector. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. you click to specify the start radius. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. The view title no longer displays. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. select Viewport : Presentation. Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. and press Enter. Using a clock as a reference.

Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned.Presentation. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown.The callout rotates 180°. under Sheets (all). double-click A105 . 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

After applying the view template to a new section view. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. 15 On the Design Bar.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 . and drag it up and to the left as shown. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. click Modify. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise.

and click OK. right-click Copy of Section 1. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. double-click Presentation Section 2. 3 In the New View Template dialog. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. enter Presentation. 7 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. under Sections (Type 1). Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. enter Presentation Section 1. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click OK. and click Rename. under Sections (Callout 1). under Sections (Type 1). Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. right-click Section 1. 6 In the Project Browser. you can simply apply the presentation view template.rvt. 4 In the View Templates dialog.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

and click OK. annotations. select Section: Presentation Section 1. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. click Add View. 18 Right-click the viewport. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. under Graphics. and click OK. Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . and click Deactivate View. under Sheets (all). and elevation swings no longer display. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. 15 Right-click the viewport.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. 14 In the Type Selector. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. under Names. and click Add View to Sheet. select Viewport : Presentation. for Rotation on Sheet. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Views dialog.Presentation. and click Activate View. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. lighting fixtures. select 90° Counterclockwise. The furniture. select Presentation. double-click A105 .

Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . traditional analytiques contain a detail. In this exercise. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. such as a tracery window or a column capital. 21 Proceed with the next exercise.

right-click Callout of Section 1. double-click Section 1. After you add the callout. select the callout. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and click Rename. 4 In the Project Browser. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. under Sections (Type 1). under Sections (Callout 1). as shown. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. click Modify.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 .

clear Annotation Crop. under Sections (Callout 1). 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Select the crop region. clear Crop Region Visible. and click OK. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. enter Presentation Callout.5 In the Rename View dialog. 8 Right-click. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. and click OK. and click View Properties. as shown. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 6 In the Project Browser. under Extents. double-click Presentation Callout.

17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. specify 22. select Custom. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. For Scale Value 1. double-click A105 .Presentation. select Section: Presentation Callout. 14 In the Type Selector. click Modify. select Viewport : Presentation. Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 .Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Views dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Add View. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. and click Activate View. under Sheets (all). Click OK. and click Add View to Sheet.

488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . activate the viewport. 23 On the Design Bar. In the steps that follow. under Sections (Callout 1). and make adjustments as necessary. and move it to the position shown below. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. click Edit/New. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. click Filled Region. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. and click Deactivate View. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. When finished. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. double-click Presentation Callout.19 Right-click the callout presentation view. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click Region Properties.

Presentation. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 28 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch.25 In the Type Properties dialog. under Sheets (all). select Solid fill. on the Design Bar. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. When you are finished. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. double-click A105 . and click OK 3 times. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. click Filled Region. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 . for Fill Pattern. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. and click Activate View. click .

32 On the Design Bar.31 On the Options Bar. 34 Select the crop region. 33 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Sketch. click (Show Crop Region). and sketch the rectangle shown below. and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click . The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region.

You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet.35 On the View Control Bar. and click Deactivate View. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. click (Hide Crop Region). 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491.

under 3D Views. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. and apply shadows to the views. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. click (Shadows Off).rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. double-click Isometric. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 3 On the View Control Bar. and click 1 : 200. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. click the Scale control. 5 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

right-click Isometric 1. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. in the list. under 3D Views. and click OK. and click OK. select Silhouette Edges. 14 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under 3D Views. For Contrast. select Directly. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. Click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under 3D Views. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. click . Select 1st Flr. enter Isometric 1. click Duplicate. and click Rename. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify 45°. under Extents. for Silhouette style. For Sun Position. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. select Cast Shadows. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. select Section Box. 12 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. A section box displays around the building model. and click OK. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 15 In the Rename View dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. enter Isometric 2. Cnst. Select Ground Plane at Level. 8 In the Name dialog. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . For Altitude. specify 135°. For Azimuth. and click Rename.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. right-click Isometric. double-click Isometric 2. and click OK. Select Relative to View. 13 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. specify 35.

20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. as shown. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. When you are finished.19 Select the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar. TIP Notice the rotation symbol. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. Grips display on each face of the section box. You can use this to rotate the section box.

Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under 3D Views. the stairs and railings may display. double-click Isometric 2. 29 To hide the section box. On the Annotation Categories tab. under Sheets (all). double-click A105 . clear Section Boxes. and click OK. enter Isometric 3. If desired. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. 22 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. and click OK. select Viewport : Presentation. under 3D Views. 21 In the Project Browser. right-click Isometric 2. and click OK. When you are finished.Presentation. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. you can adjust the plane location. under 3D Views. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Rename View dialog. 24 In the Project Browser. 31 In the Project Browser. The section box no longer displays.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. 25 To hide the section box. make a copy of the view. under 3D Views. 27 Select the section box. Next. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. clear Section Boxes. click Modify on the Design Bar. In the Type Selector. double-click Isometric 3. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. On the Annotation Categories tab. and click Rename. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

select Viewport : Presentation. 33 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.32 In the Project Browser. In the Type Selector. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . In the Type Selector. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. The filled region partially covers the view. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. select Viewport : Presentation. under 3D Views.

The image below shows the redrawn lines. click Edit/New. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. This will make it easier to draw lines. 42 Using the drawing tools. select Transparent. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. 36 On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. 39 For Background. click Region Properties. 41 On the Design Bar. click Edit. select Concrete.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 40 Click OK twice. 35 Select the poche filled region. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Activate View. for Fill Patterns. click Lines.

for Fill Pattern. click Edit/New. 47 On the Design Bar.43 On the Design Bar. select Solid fill. 46 Click OK twice. and click Deactivate View. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Region Properties. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 45 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. click Finish Sketch. 44 In the Element Properties dialog.

double-click 1st Flr.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. Cnst. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. then you specify the eye direction and range. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Camera. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . under Floor Plans. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. a cutaway perspective view. The view opens immediately. you add it to the presentation sheet. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. you create the final view for the analytique.

and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Silhouette Edges. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify the following: Under Shadow. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 6 On the View Control Bar. click . Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. and click OK. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). For Contrast. select Cast Shadows. for Silhouette style. For Sun Position. for Name. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . specify 35.

Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 . and click OK. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. select Section Box. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. A section box now cuts through the building model. Grips display on each plane of the section box. 12 Select the section box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents.

Presentation. clear Section Boxes. On the Annotation Categories tab. under Change. select Viewport : Presentation. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. you must specify the actual size of the image. In the Type Selector. under Sheets (all). 15 On the Options Bar. under 3D Views. 18 On the View Control Bar. select Scale (locked proportions). 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. and click OK. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. for Width. 19 To hide the section box.14 Select the crop region. and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. enter 165 mm. click (Hide Crop Region). drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. click Size. 21 In the Project Browser. 17 Under Model Crop Size. double-click A105 .

4 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Title. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click it in the Project Browser. click Edit/New. select the same font as the title. and click OK. specify a text size of 40 mm. click Edit/New. under Text.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate. under Text. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. select Text : Title. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 .rvt. Annotating the Analytique on page 503. Annotating the Analytique | 503 . Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. 6 In the Name dialog. click OK. and click OK. select a font. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. enter Description. click . specify a text size of 6 mm. and click OK. 10 In the Name dialog. and click OK. click Text. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate.Presentation sheet is not the active view.

click Modify.15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. select Text : Description. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 18 On the Design Bar. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 16 In the Type Selector. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. In this tutorial. After you import the SketchUp model. 507 . Once the model has been imported. you create a small building from the front mass form. curtain walls. that compose the building.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. such as walls. you can easily add detail with Revit components. and roofs.

The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. and click OK.rte. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Name dialog.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. 9 In the informational dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. right-click in the Design Bar. and not in the library. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. select Auto-Detect. click the Massing tab. enter Import SketchUp. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. click Browse.skp. visible elements. click OK. you create a Revit Architecture project. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. and click Save. buildings. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. click Create Mass. or select from a list. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. Click the Sketchup file. click Training Files. For Layers. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. For Colors. select SketchUp Files. Double-click the Common folder. select Preserve. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. 4 In the New Project dialog. For Files of type. click OK. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . and click Massing on the context menu that displays. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. select All. For Import units. for File name. 6 In the Save As dialog. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. enter SketchUp Model. 2 In the New Project dialog. under Template file.

Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . curtain walls. click Finish Mass. 14 On the View toolbar. select Level 1. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. Level 1 is the only choice. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. click . The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. 17 In the warning dialog. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. and roofs. ■ ■ For Positioning. For Place at level. 16 On the Design Bar. such as walls. In a new project. select Manual .Center. depending on the complexity of the project. click the Close button. Click Open.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. click Roof by Face. and on the View Control Bar. and when the cursor displays a plus sign. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. verify Level 2 is selected.400mm displays. that compose the building. such as walls. select the face so that it highlights in red. 3 In the Type Selector. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. After you create the building from the mass faces. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. verify Basic Roof: Generic . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. 4 On the Options Bar. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. for Level. curtain walls. Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. and roofs. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .18 Proceed to the next exercise.

A roof is created from the mass face. verify that Select Multiple is selected. 6 On the Options Bar. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. on the View toolbar.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. To see the new roof. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar. click to display masses.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. click Create Roof. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . 9 On the Options Bar. click Create Roof. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. on the Options Bar. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active.

13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel.■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. click Roof by Face. 12 On the Design Bar. click Create Roof. 512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 14 On the Options Bar.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 .200mm displays. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. select Core Face: Exterior. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. for Loc Line. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. 16 On the View toolbar. click Modify to end the command. 21 On the Design Bar. click roofs that you created. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. 22 In the Type Selector. 23 On the Options Bar. click Wall by Face. verify Basic Wall: Generic .15 On the Design Bar.

click to view only the walls and roofs. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. click Curtain System by Face. 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 29 Select the left face of the left mass.24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. 28 In the Type Selector. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. 25 On the View toolbar. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar.

click Create System. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 . click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel.30 On the Options Bar. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms. 31 Using the same technique. 32 On the View toolbar.

press TAB until the desired wall highlights. click Create Roof. and select it. and on the Options Bar. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Wall by Face. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. click Roof by Face. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. and on the Options Bar. click Curtain System. select the other wall.35 On the Design Bar. click Create System. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. 38 Select the mass face shown below.

45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. 43 Click to redisplay the masses. under Floor Plans. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. Below the right corner of the view.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. click Camera. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . click to view the building that you have created. click Wall by Face. and select the mass face shown below. specify a point to place the camera. double-click Level 1. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. 42 On the View toolbar.

■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. roofs. as shown. specify a point for the camera target. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . The perspective view created by the camera displays. click your building in the view. to view only the walls. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. 48 On the View toolbar. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. Click the frame to display its grips.

Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. click . select Center. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . Under Grid 2 Pattern. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. select Center. Click OK. click Modify. Under Grid 1 Pattern. 50 On the Options Bar. for Justification. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. and select the left curtain system in the view. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . for Justification.

60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. under 3D Views. 55 Right-click. click Door. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 63 In the Type Selector. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 59 On the View toolbar. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 56 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D View 1. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. double-click {3D}. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . and move the roof edges as shown below. under 3D Views. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click Cancel to end the command.54 Select each roof to display its grips. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser.

64 Add doors to the building as shown below. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 . 65 Save and close the drawing.

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

and you can change these elements individually. you create a curtain system using the wall command. and mullions. For example. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. To switch panel types. you need to change the length of the wall.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. or you can use a specific curtain system command. Like walls. Like windows. grid lines. to resize the system. you need to select a panel. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. you select the grid. 525 . Flat Curtain System In this lesson. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. Unlike windows. This affects the entire curtain system. To change grids. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. panel. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. and they are not windows.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Wall. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. click Training Files. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. and double-click Ground Floor. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. 4 In the Type Selector. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rvt. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 5 Start the curtain system where shown.

Creating an Entrance | 527 . 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 8 In the Project Browser. and double-click Southeast Isometric.7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views.

Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. top and base attachments. using curtain grids. and room bounding. For Top Offset. and click (Properties). select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel.11 Select the curtain system. enter 1200. 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. top constraint. Click OK.

and click OK. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line.a. 18 In the Project Browser. click Curtain Grid. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. right-click Elevation 1 . 25 On the Design Bar. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Modify. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. Creating an Entrance | 529 . 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. 20 In the drawing area. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click GROUND FLOOR. click Elevation.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. and resize the crop boundary as shown.

select SECOND FLOOR. while pressing CTRL. 33 On the Design Bar. one larger than the other. FOURTH FLOOR. Click to place another grid line. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. FIFTH FLOOR. click Curtain Grid. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . THIRD FLOOR. and SEVENTH FLOOR. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. SIXTH FLOOR. click Modify. Click to create a vertical grid. select the 3 grid lines you just placed.26 While pressing CTRL. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and click OK. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights.

you add a doorway to the curtain system. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. The segment line style changes to dashed. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. Instead of using the Door command. Creating an Entrance | 531 . The two segments are removed.Next. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. and on the Options Bar. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. click Add or Remove Segments. and then select the segment above it. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel.

remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step.38 Using the same method. select One Segment. and lock them. 39 On the Design Bar. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 40 On the Options Bar. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 42 Place dimensions as shown. click Curtain Grid.

46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. 43 Delete the dimensions. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. click in any white space to exit the editor. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. Use the following image as a guide. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). Creating an Entrance | 533 . click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid.

52 On the Type Selector. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. not as curtain panels. 55 In the Project Browser. on the new curtain system you added. click Training Files.Next. 56 In the Project Browser. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Modify. 54 On the Design Bar. double-click Entrance Elevation. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. 57 On the View Control Bar.rfa. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. click view. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. under Elevations. Now. This changes the graphics style of the Next. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. under Floor Plans. and click Wireframe. The panel changes to a double door. These panels schedule as doors. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. They are part of the curtain panel category. . You will have to press TAB to highlight it.

click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. click System Panel : Solid. The glazed panels display in blue. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. and the solid panels display in white. 65 On the View Control Bar. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel.60 On the Type Selector. click . and Material specifies the shading and patterning. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. 63 Click OK twice. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. Creating an Entrance | 535 . 61 With the panel still selected.

3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. 4 On the Options Bar. click Save As. select Entire Grid Line. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. click Mullion.rvt. select Grid Line Segment. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 2 On the Options Bar. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. you place mullions on curtain panel grids.68 On the File menu. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. because their width reduces the size of the doors. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. clickModify. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. You are going to change some mullion joins.6 On the Options Bar. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. 10 Delete the mullions below them. however. select All Empty Segments. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. so you remove them next. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 . there are a few that you do not want.

and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. you can also right-click. click Modify. 17 Save the file. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. 14 Click the top mullion control. 15 On the Design Bar.Two mullion join controls display. double-click Southeast Isometric. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 16 In the Project Browser. Finally.

Curved Curtain System | 539 . The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. for Top Constraint. enter 1200. Click OK. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. click Wall.Curved Curtain System In this lesson. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. For Top Offset. double-click GROUND FLOOR. (Arc passing through three points). You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Finally. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you add a curtain system using the wall command. 7 On the Options Bar. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. under Floor Plans.

click Curtain Grid. double-click East. you place grids on the system. 14 In the Project Browser. and then sixteenths. Divide the halves into quarters. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You are going to use one of these snaps points. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. eighths. under Elevations. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed.10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. Next. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc.

Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. select the bottom layer of panels. 16 On the Design Bar. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. click Modify. 18 In the Type Selector. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. Next. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. to filter out all 19 Save the file. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 .300mm. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. you change some panels in the system.15 Zoom in to the cylinder. select Basic Wall: Generic . This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. double-click Exterior. 6 On the Options Bar. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. for Depth. select Glass. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Training Files. 5 On the Design Bar.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 8 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. clear Chain. under Elevations. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. click Lines. 11 On the Design Bar. click . 4 On the Design Bar. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. . and click . click Model Lines. 3 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Options Bar. 9 Select the extrusion. enter 100.rft.

18 Load the Curtain Panel . click 25 On the View toolbar. 21 In the Type Selector.rfa. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. select Curtain Panel . All fourth floor panels are selected. click Modify. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. right-click. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted.Pattern. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. under Floor Plans. (SteeringWheels).Pattern. and return to the project file. 19 In the Project Browser.rfa family.14 On the Design Bar. 24 On the View toolbar. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 . 23 Right-click. click (Default 3D View). and click Change Walls Orientation. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. and save the family as Curtain Panel . 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Pattern. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close.

29 In the Type Selector. right-click. select System Panel . 30 Save the file. All fifth floor panels are selected. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc.Solid. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. under Floor Plans. All the panels change to the solid panel. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. 27 In the Project Browser. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel.

9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon).Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and select it. select Mullion. click Lines. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. 1 In the Project Browser. click ■ ■ For Sides. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and enter 50 mm for the radius. 8 On the Design Bar. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. under Elevations. double-click East. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.rft. Select Radius. Click again to specify the ending point. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . enter 8. for Profile Usage. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. and click OK. . 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. For vertical mullions. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. click Training Files. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Mullion. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion.

31 Click . and click OK.detail. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion.11 On the Design Bar. 20 Select the detail component. 17 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. click Modify. click Training Files. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and return to the project file. and click OK. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Visibility. After the new profile is loaded. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog.rfa family. 28 On the View toolbar. and click Visibility. clear Coarse and Medium. click Mullion. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. click Modify. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . click Detail Component. 27 In the Project Browser. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 13 On the Options Bar.rfa. double-click Southeast Isometric. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. under 3D Views.rfa. clear Fine. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. it can be added as a mullion type. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. click (SteeringWheels).

43 Press DELETE. 41 In the Project Browser. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 40 On the Design Bar.32 In the Element Properties dialog. 37 Click OK twice. select Circular Mullion for Family. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. so you remove the unwanted ones. click Modify. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. select All Empty Segments. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. 36 Under Construction. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . 34 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. right-click. 33 Click Edit/New. under Floor Plans. 38 On the Options Bar. for Profile. and click OK. 44 Save the file. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. You have placed more mullions than you want.

select Defines slope. All the inside faces highlight. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . make custom curtain panels and mullions. a storefront system.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. and press TAB. In this lesson. 4 On the Design Bar. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 5 On the Options Bar. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. double-click TOP OF ROOF. and you can click to select them all. and then apply those custom elements to the system. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. TIP To chain select all the walls. and a ruled curtain system. you learned to create a curved curtain system. click Pick Walls. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. under Floor Plans.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.7 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. 18 Save the file. Sloped Glazings | 549 . 10 In the Project Browser. click Finish Roof. click Roof Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 11 On the View Control Bar. 17 On the View Control Bar. double-click Southeast Isometric. 14 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. click Mullion. Click OK. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. enter 600. select Entire Grid Line.

You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. 4 In the Type Selector. double-click GROUND FLOOR. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. select Unconnected for Height. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 1 In the Project Browser.Storefront System In this exercise. and enter 2400. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. 5 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. click Wall.

7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. The curtain wall cuts the original wall. enter 10200 mm. 10 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Design Bar. 12 Select the storefront wall. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. This specifies an exact length for the wall. Storefront System | 551 . 8 Click the temporary dimension. double-click Southeast Isometric. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. even if the wall height changes. and press ENTER. under 3D Views. click Modify. click Edit/New. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. For this wall. and click . 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. which is specified in the type. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. To see how the grid layout is defined.

enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. Justification. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. 20 Save the file. under 3D Views. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. 19 Select a curtain grid. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and Offset. enter 15. click Mullion. see the Revit Architecture help. In this exercise. 18 On the Options Bar. you find Number.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. or end. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. 16 Click OK. By setting the Angle value. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. Angle. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select All Empty Segments. center. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. double-click Southeast Isometric. 1 In the Project Browser. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. 6 Click the highlighted line. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. Curtain System by Lines | 553 .3 On the View Control Bar. and highlight the model line. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab.

you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 9 On the Design Bar. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. Next. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. and click . Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. click Modify. 11 Click OK. click Curtain Grid. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system.8 Select the highlighted line. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. A panel between the 2 lines is created. 10 Select the panel.

Curtain System by Lines | 555 . 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. embed a curtain system inside another wall. 16 In the Type Selector. quarters. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. and then eighths. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. Finally. and then eighths. quarters. select System Panel : Solid. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. 18 Save the file. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. right-click. and define a ruled curtain system. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel.

556 .

In this tutorial. you learn to create several different types of roofs. gable. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. mansard. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. In this exercise. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. Before you can sketch the roof profile. including hip. and soffits to the roofs that you create. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. and low sloped roofs. In this lesson. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. gutters. you learn how to add fascia.Roofs 15 In this lesson. 557 . shed. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In addition. You do not need to create the work plane.

centerline. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. and click OK. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. and so on). 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline.rvt.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. click the blue square on the witness line. expand Floor Plans. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Name. 4 Click OK. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. click Ref Plane. and double-click Level 1. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. click Training Files. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. 5 In the Go To View dialog. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. and open Metric\m_Roofs. expand Views (all).

11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 . 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face.

The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the View toolbar.Next. click Lines. select Chain. 560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch the roof profile. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane.

and select the second wall. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. expand Views (all). press TAB. The roof should resemble the following illustration. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. 19 On the Tools toolbar. click Modify. Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . and double-click Section 1.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). expand Sections (Type 1). click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. press CTRL. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. 17 On the Tools toolbar. 18 Select the edge of the roof. 21 In the Project Browser. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. Next. and then select the exterior face of the wall.

25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof.24 On the Options Bar. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. click Attach for Top/Base. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. click model. 26 On the View toolbar. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise.

6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. and enter 600 for Overhang. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Pick Walls. verify that Defines slope is selected. 3 In the Project Browser. and click Yes. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 . expand Floor Plans. sketch the roof footprint. m_Roofs. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. and double-click Garage Roof.rvt. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. Next. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 5 On the Options Bar. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. expand Views (all).

By default. 8 On the Options Bar. click Finish Roof. 13 On the Design Bar. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. select both slope definition lines. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. click the model. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. 11 Press CTRL. and click OK. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. clear Defines slope. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Properties). Next. click Modify. 14 When you see the informational dialog. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. 15 On the View toolbar. under Dimensions.

the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. and double-click Level 3. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 .rvt.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. When you complete the roof. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. and enter 600 for Overhang. m_Roofs. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 3 On the Options Bar. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. click Pick Walls. press TAB. clear Defines slope.

click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. Next. click (Rectangle). 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. add new slope lines to the roof. 17 When you see the informational dialog. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan.6 Click to select all the walls. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. select Defines Slope. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . sketch the chimney opening. 8 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. 9 Using automatic snaps. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 15 On the Options bar. Next. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the View menu. click Lines. click Finish Roof. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. click Modify. select Defines Slope.

4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Defines slope.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click Level 2. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. expand Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. m_Roofs. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . click Pick Walls. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. and enter 600 for Overhang.18 On the View toolbar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.

click (Trim/Extend). Next. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 10 On the Options Bar. Next. close the roof sketch. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. select the left vertical slope definition line. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. using the following illustration for guidance. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building.5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. 9 On the Tools toolbar. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. and click (Pick Lines). verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. click Lines. clear Defines Slope. 11 To trim the first line segment. 7 On the Options Bar.

12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. click Roof Properties. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. and click OK. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. 14 Under Constraints. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. click (SteeringWheels). 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 . Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. 16 On the View toolbar. click Finish Roof. click Modify. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. Next. 17 On the View toolbar.

21 Click (SteeringWheels). Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 23 On the Tools toolbar. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). join the two remaining walls to the roof. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. Next. 22 Using the same method that you used previously.

1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 6 On the Options Bar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. enter 0 for Overhang. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. m_Roofs. expand Floor Plans.Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. click Pick Walls. press TAB. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 . 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. click (Trim/Extend). Next. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected.rvt. select the left vertical roof line. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. 9 On the Options Bar. clear Defines Slope. expand Views (all). and enter 300 for Overhang. 8 On the Tools toolbar. and double-click Level 2. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. 10 To trim the first line segment. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572.11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. expand Views (all). 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select Defines slope. Next. expand 3D Views. 19 On the View toolbar. and press ENTER. you add a slope-defining line. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. and double-click 3D. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 1 In the Project Browser. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. 16 Under Constraints. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 21 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. click 20 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). click Roof Properties. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. m_Roofs. click Modify.

15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. 12 On the Options Bar. To help locate the position of each split. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. and double-click Level 2. and enter 600 for Offset. click Modify. Before you can add slope arrows. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. expand Floor Plans. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 14 On the Options Bar. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. add two new slope arrows. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. clear Defines Slope. 9 On the Tools menu. 11 On the Design Bar. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. Next. Next. 5 On the View menu. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. 3 On the Options Bar. click Slope Arrow. expand Views (all). 4 In the Project Browser. click Split Walls and Lines. click (Pick Lines). you need to add two reference planes. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. 7 On the Options Bar. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope.

and then click OK. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. 16 Repeat steps 13 . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. expand Views (all). 3 On the Options Bar. click Edit.rvt. m_Roofs. 20 Under Dimensions. click Modify. select both slope arrows. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click 19 Under Constraints. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. and move the cursor to place the arrow. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. When eave heights differ. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. When you sketch a hip roof. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. enter 500 for Rise/1000. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage.15 to add the second slope arrow. (Properties). Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. select Slope for Specify. 18 Press CTRL. the adjacent eave heights must align. and double-click Garage Roof.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. 1 In the Project Browser.

The eave lines display with a dimension. select a method to align the eaves. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. on the Options Bar. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click Finish Roof.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). select Defines Slope. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. 13 On the View toolbar. click Align Eaves. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. When aligning eaves. on the File menu. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. Next. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. and click OK. click Save As. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. (Properties). click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 5 On the Options Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . 14 If you want to save your changes. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. under Dimensions. 10 On the Options Bar. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. 12 On the Design Bar.

(Properties). click Modify. on the Options Bar. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 Select the roof and. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. and double-click North. under Constraints.rvt. expand Views (all). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. expand Elevations.Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

6 On the View toolbar. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. press TAB. and then select Defines slope. click (Pick Lines). 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). 10 On the Options Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. and click OK. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 14 On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 3. Next. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . under Dimensions. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. click . click Finish Roof. and select the remaining three lines.

After you add the roof. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click mansard roof.17 On the View toolbar. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. click Training Files.rvt. you add a roof to a building shell. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof.

under Floor Plans. double-click Roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 . 3 On the Design Bar. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. verify that Defines slope is not selected. click Pick Walls. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the drawing area. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 4 On the Options Bar.

as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. click (Trim/Extend). for Type. 11 On the Design Bar. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. click Finish Roof. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 7 On the Tools toolbar.Insulation on Metal Deck . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. select Steel Truss . click Roof Properties.Because the walls are not continuous. and click OK.EPDM.

Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . In the next steps. 16 On the Options Bar. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. double-click the section head to open the section view. click (Draw Split Lines). double-click Roof. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. The roof has been created. under Floor Plans. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. and click to select it. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof.

20 Using the same method.17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . move the cursor horizontally to the left. and select a point on the opposite roof line. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. 18 Move the cursor down.

You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. You modify the points individually. Next. In this exercise. on the Options Bar. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 . 23 On the Options Bar. (Add points). click (Modify Sub-Elements). Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected.The roof is now divided into 6 sections. exact placement of the points is not important.

specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. for the dimension. enter -2''. 25 Using the same method. and press ENTER. The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs .24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. click (Modify Sub-Elements).

enter 4''. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. for Elevation. including the interior edges of the roof regions. and on the Options Bar. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . 29 On the Design Bar.27 Press and hold CTRL. click Modify. 31 Select the roof slab. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. and press ENTER. and select all of the roof edges. click (Properties). as shown: 28 On the Options Bar.

click Edit. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 36 View the results in the section view. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. Gutters. click Edit/New. 37 If you want to save your changes. 35 Click OK 3 times. Creating Fascia. gutters. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . you learn how to create roof fascia. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. you can easily create its fascia. under Construction.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. After you create a roof. By making the insulation layer variable. click Save As. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. In some cases this type of slope is desired. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. select Variable. and Soffits on page 586. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and Soffits In this lesson. for Structure. and soffits in Revit Architecture. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. Creating Fascia. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. Gutters. The entire slab is sloped. for the Thermal/Air Layer. on the File menu. and soffits. gutters. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result.

click Training Files. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. under Construction. click (Properties). 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. and click Open. and click OK twice. 8 In the Name dialog. click Training Files. and open Common\c_Condominium. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . 5 On the Options Bar.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile.rfa. click Duplicate. 3 Press CTRL.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. enter Built-up Fascia.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. and click OK. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs.

click Modify to exit the Fascia command. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Gutters on page 588.rvt. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs . you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. 13 On the Design Bar.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 2 On the Options Bar. c_Condominium. Creating Gutters In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click (Properties).

3 In the Properties dialog. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. click in the Value field for Material. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. Creating Gutters | 589 . under Construction. . 10 Click to place the gutter. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. click Edit/New. Creating Soffits on page 590. click Duplicate. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. and click OK three times. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 4 In the Type Properties dialog.

click Pick Roofs. you learn how to place a roof soffit. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 3 On the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Roof. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Creating Soffits In this exercise. c_Condominium. expand Views.

and then select the soffit to join them.4 Select the roof. expand Views (all). expand 3D Views. 7 On the Tools menu. click Join Geometry. and double-click 3D. Creating Soffits | 591 . 6 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. 8 Select the roof. 5 On the Design Bar. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap.

9 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Save As. on the File menu.

You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. If you are using metric units. select mm. Click OK. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. In the final exercise. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. your values will be different. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. click Project Units. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. select Millimeters.rvt. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. For Unit Suffix. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. Finally. click Training Files. 593 . You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. 2 In the Project Units dialog. under Length. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. and open Common\c_Area. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes.

expand Views (all). click the Room Calculations tab. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. select 2 decimal places. and click Room and Area. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. right-click in the Design Bar. Click OK. For Unit Suffix. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme.3 Under Area. expand Floor Plans. click OK. select Square meters. it is not necessary in this exercise. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 4 In the Project Units dialog. click Settings. These schemes define spatial relationships. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units. select m2. or 0. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. the system-computed height defaults to the level. click the Area Schemes tab. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. For Rounding. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level.

9 Click Cancel. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. To modify the area. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. under Views (all). NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. 12 When the informational dialog displays. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. Click OK. click Area.You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. you must manually add these boundary lines. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. If you select No. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. forming a closed loop. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. 13 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. click Area Plan. rather than the area tag. Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. When you select Yes in this dialog. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. you must select one of the reference lines.

Expand Area Plans (Rentable). Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). click Area Plan. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. click Area Boundary. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. you create a new area plan for rentable space. Next. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. common areas. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. 21 On the Options Bar.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . and store area. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog.

and click to select the area. 27 On the Options Bar. click Area. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. 23 On the Design Bar. click Modify. you can either draw them or pick them. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 . 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area.When you add area boundary lines. click ■ . 25 On the Design Bar. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. When you pick the walls. If you do not select this option.

Click OK. Select Office area for Area Type. click ■ ■ ■ . In the Element Properties dialog. do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name.■ ■ Select Office area for Area Type. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 29 On the Design Bar. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. 31 On the Design Bar. click Modify and select the area. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. 32 On the Options Bar. Click OK. click Area. Select Building Common Area for Area Type.

and Tenant 4 in the lower right. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. 35 Add an area to the building model core. and select Store Area for Area Type.■ Click OK. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. enter Core for Name. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right.

2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. click Save. click Color Scheme Legend. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. In this exercise. name the project Area-in progress. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. 37 On the File menu. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .Notice that within the two store areas. and click Save. and click to place the legend.rvt. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. In the next exercise.

under Category. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar.3 When the dialog displays. and click OK. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . 8 Add the fields Area and Name. 7 Under Available fields. click Schedule/Quantities. select Areas (Rentable). click the Fields tab. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. select Area Type and click Add. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog.

602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule.9 Click OK.

Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. roofs. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. and roofs. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. floors. After creating mass floors. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. After you make building elements. If you modify a massing face. curtain systems. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. you can specify the view to display massing elements. In this tutorial. At any time. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. floor. and perimeter information. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. building elements. volume. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. 603 . you then need to update the building face. and floors. You assign the default wall. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. or both. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area.

4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. and click Massing.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. double-click Level 1. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. and cutting geometry. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Views (all). click Create Mass. click Training Files. sweeps. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.rvt. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and click OK. click 18 On the Options Bar. (Line). 13 On the View toolbar. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Finish Sketch. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and on the Options Bar. for Offset. select Mass (Opaque). enter 25000. under Views (all). 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click the value for Material. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. for Name. under Constraints. 15 On the View Control Bar. and click . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 . click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. click (Default 3D View). (Pick Lines). 16 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. and click OK. click Lines. and on the Options Bar. under Materials and Finishes. click Lines. 12 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 10 In the Materials dialog. 8 On the Design Bar.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. for Extrusion End. enter 1550 mm. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. click Extrusion Properties.

and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. under Views (all). 23 In the Materials dialog. double-click West. and click OK. click the value for Material. for Name. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. 30 In the drawing area. select Mass (Transparent). 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Materials and Finishes. and click OK.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. click Finish Sketch. press TAB to highlight the entire face. 28 On the Design Bar. select Pick a plane. The second form is on top of the first form. under Views (all). for Extrusion End. enter 25000. 21 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. highlight the larger form. under Elevations (Building Elevation). TIP If necessary. for Extrusion Start. click Extrusion Properties. enter 27500. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. and click . 26 In the Project Browser. 25 On the Design Bar. double-click {3D} to see the results.

and on the Options Bar. click (Draw). click (Arc passing through three points). Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 . 37 On the Options Bar. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown.31 Click to select the face. and click to select the line start point. and clear Chain. (Pick Lines). click Lines. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. Next. 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. 34 On the Options Bar.

45 In the Project Browser. click (Move). and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. double-click East. 46 On the Design Bar. 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line.TIP If you do not see this option. Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. click the arrow next to the drawing options. 41 On the Edit toolbar. 39 On the Design Bar. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. click Modify. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 608 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Views (all). click Lines and. (Line). click Edit Top. and delete the vertical construction line. on the Options Bar.

50 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. 53 On the View toolbar. and that -92000 is specified for Second End. In the next exercise. (Arc passing through three points). 51 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . 52 On the Design Bar. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. for Material. click (Default 3D View). click 49 Create an arc as shown.48 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Blend Properties.

Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. 1 In the Project Browser. click (Line). under Floor Plans.rvt. under Views (all). 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. and select Chain. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. double-click Level 1. 4 On the Options bar. click Lines. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. m_Massing_Start. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. 2 In the drawing area. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. select the mass. click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. as shown. 10 On the Options Bar. click Ref Plane. 7 Using the same technique. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . 9 On the Design Bar. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids.

17 On the View toolbar. click Extrusion Properties. 13 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. on the View Control Bar. enter 0. for Extrusion End. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. 14 Under Constraints. When sketching each extrusion. 15 Click OK. 16 On the Design Bar. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. Using Swept Blends | 611 . In this exercise. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. click (Default 3D View). enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. snap the corners to the intersections.

612 | Chapter 17 Massing . m_Massing_Start. ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. double-click Level 1.rvt. ■ For the radius. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points).NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. select a point below the mass elements. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. 4 On the Options Bar. and click Lines. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. click Sketch 2D Path. under Floor Plans. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser.

click Lines. 6 On the Design Bar. as shown. 8 On the Design Bar. The only way to align these elements is visually. and click Edit. and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. 11 On the Options Bar. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. verify that <By Sketch> is selected. Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. 9 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. Using Swept Blends | 613 .Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. click (Default 3D View). click (Rectangle). From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. click Finish Path. click Profile 1.

and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. click Finish Profile. 15 On the Design Bar.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. click (Align). 17 Using the same method.13 On the Tools toolbar. as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . and press ESC. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar. Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. click Profile 2. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges.

20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Swept Blend Properties. Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Materials dialog. click Finish Swept Blend.18 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. Using Swept Blends | 615 . 22 Click OK twice. select Mass (Transparent). click Finish Profile. click <By Category>. and click .

You place several instances of the mass families into the project. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. Finally.24 On the Design Bar. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. you create new family types from a mass family file. In this exercise. click Finish Mass. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it.rvt.

for Height. click Family Types. 9 Click OK.rfa. 6 For Width. for Width. click Training Files. and click OK. and for Name. for Height. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. click New. under Other. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 8 For Width. enter 15000mm. for Height. and for Name. 4 In the Family Types dialog. In this exercise. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. enter 6000 mm. for Depth. and click Apply. and click OK. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. enter 18000 mm. enter 12000 mm. enter 18000 mm. 2 In the Family Types dialog. for Depth. 7 Click New. enter 11000 mm. 5 Click New. and click Apply.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter 68000 mm. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. and click Apply. enter 46000mm. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. for Depth. enter 9000 mm. 3 In the Name dialog.rfa.

and Triangle.rfa family files. 2 In the Project Browser. Arc Dome.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You also load other existing mass families and place them. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. click Training Files.rfa. under Views (all).Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. double-click Site. click Place Mass. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. click Training Files. 3 On the View Control Bar. 8 In the Type Selector. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. as shown. 1 If not already selected. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. Semi Barrel Vault. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. (Show Mass) to show the massing model. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.rfa. 6 Open the Box-Training. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing . on the View toolbar. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm.

22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. click Place Mass. 20 In the Type Selector. 23 On the Options Bar. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. for the Material parameter. 16 On the Design Bar. and click to place the mass. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice. 25 In the drawing area. click Place Mass. as shown. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . click Modify. and on the Options Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. select the triangle. 24 On the Design Bar. select Rotate after placement. select the 3 boxes. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. specify Mass (Transparent). click Modify. click Modify. enter 90 for Angle.10 On the Design Bar. specify Mass (Opaque). 11 Select the box. and click OK twice. 17 Press CTRL. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. click (Element Properties). select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 14 In the Type Selector. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. 21 On the Options Bar. for the Material parameter. and click (Element Properties). 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.

30 Place the box mass family as shown. 33 On the View toolbar. specify Mass (Opaque). 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). for the Material parameter. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. click (Default 3D View). 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and click (Element Properties).26 Select the triangle. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. click Place Mass. and click OK twice. 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click OK twice. specify Mass (Transparent). for the Material parameter. 29 In the Type Selector. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.

You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. Joining Mass Elements | 621 . NOTE When you join geometry. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. In the next exercise. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. you join these mass elements. click (Default 3D View).rvt file. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar.Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. (Join Geometry). In this exercise.

on the Edit toolbar.3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. 4 Select the triangle. under Floor Plans. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. double-click Site. 622 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Views (all). Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. click (Mirror).

16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. (Join Geometry). 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. click (Draw). 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. enter SM. click (Default 3D View). for Axis. Joining Mass Elements | 623 . and then select the triangle. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. as shown.8 On the Options Bar. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. 17 Press ESC to see the result. 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally.

In this exercise. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. 2 On the Window menu. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. click (Add to Design Option Set). (If Design Options is already selected. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. click Modify. you joined mass elements together. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. do not clear the check mark. and select the triangle mass element.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing .rvt. 1 On the Design Bar.

4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. under Views (all). 17 In the Type Selector. 7 In the Type Selector. 8 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. clear Curved. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. 5 In the Project Browser. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. click Modify. select Rotate after placement. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice. 14 In the drawing area. and click (Element Properties). double-click Site. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. for the Material parameter. click Place Mass. and click OK. 13 On the Design Bar. click Place Mass. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. specify Mass (Transparent). select Sloped (primary). for Angle. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. under Floor Plans. enter 90.

clear Sloped. under Elevations. While pressing CTRL. 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. select the three arc domes. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. and click OK. TIP To find the correct shapes. and watch the status bar.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. click Modify. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. 19 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice. specify Mass (Transparent). 20 In the drawing area. 28 In the Project Browser. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. select Curved. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. under Views (all). double-click {3D}. under 3D Views. double-click North. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. under Views (all). click (Add to Design Option Set). 21 In the Element Properties dialog. and click (Element Properties). for the Material parameter. 23 On the View Control Bar. 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . 22 In the Project Browser.

you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. you can make it the primary option. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 33 In the Design Options dialog.rvt. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. In this exercise. and click Close. you placed mass elements into Design Options. click (Design Options). 34 Close the warning that displays. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . click Make Primary. click the Design Options tab. under Option. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. 31 Click the value for Design Option. select Curved from the Design Option menu. and click OK. select Curved and.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. 35 On the File menu.

7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. click Training Files. select Basic Wall: Exterior . and for Loc Line. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Brick on CMU. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the View toolbar.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. click Wall by Face. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.rvt. double-click {3D}. 5 In the Type Selector. 6 On the Options Bar. click (Show Mass) to show the massing model. 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). select Wall Centerline. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing . click (Pick Faces). TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. you pick massing faces to create walls.

13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. click Wall by Face. 14 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. click Wall by Face. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 8 In the Project Browser. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. double-click Level 3. click Wall by Face. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. under Views (all). 15 On the Design Bar. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. 12 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 16 In the Type Selector. under Views (all). 9 On the Design Bar. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . under Floor Plans. double-click Level 5.

18 Select all the faces shown in red. 19 In the Project Browser. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . If desired. 20 On the View Control Bar. under Views (all). and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. click Wall by Face. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. double-click Level 9. 21 On the Design Bar. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results.

Curtain Systems. 8 On the Design Bar. clear Curtain Panels. double-click {3D}. 1 In the Project Browser. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 6 On the Options Bar. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. 4 Click OK. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. and Walls. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Mass Floors. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. volume. select all levels. When you select levels. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area.In this exercise. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. click Modify. and exterior surface area. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 .rvt. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. under Views (all). Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. perimeter. and click OK.

13 On the Design Bar. select Levels 1-4. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Mass Floors. 12 In the Mass Floors dialog. 11 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 10 Press CTRL.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. and click OK. and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown.

click Mass Floors. 16 On the Options Bar. select Level 1. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 .14 On the Options Bar. NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. 15 Press CTRL. and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. and click OK.

The Floor Area. and click OK.rvt. Floor Perimeter. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects.In this exercise. 4 Using the same method. and select Level. under Available fields. select Floor Area. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. select Mass Floor. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Floor Volume. press and hold SHIFT. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. schedules can be created using the mass floors. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. and click Add. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Category.

Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. for Sort by. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. and click OK.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. for Usage. The Mass Floor Schedule displays. enter Retail. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . select Mass: Family and Type. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule.

and click Remove. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Mass: Family and Type. and click Move Up until Level is listed second. for Fields. right-click Mass Floor Schedule.Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. under Other. After you assign usage. under Scheduled fields (in order). and click Properties. click Edit. expand Schedules/Quantities. click Move Up until Usage is listed first. 14 Select Level. 13 With Usage selected.

select Usage. and click OK. under Other. for Sort by. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. for Filter. and click OK. 19 Click OK twice. 22 In the Project Browser. in the field under Filter by. 27 Click OK twice. and select Grand totals. under Other. select Usage. and click Properties. and click Rename. 24 In the Project Browser. enter Hotel. 23 In the Rename View dialog. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. for Field formatting. under Fields. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. for Filter. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. click Edit. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. for Filter by. 16 On the Formatting tab. and in the field below. select Floor Area. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. select Calculate totals. select Level. elevation. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 On the Filter tab. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . click Edit. and plan views. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. for Then by. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab.

The mass floor schedules list. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise.rvt. you created mass floor schedules. you pick massing faces to create roofs.In this exercise. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. the floor area. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. under Views (all). floor perimeter. by level. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Roof by Face. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}.

400mm. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. click Create Roof. Your model should now look as shown. 5 On the Options Bar. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. select Basic Roof : Generic . and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 . click Create Roof.4 In the Type Selector. 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest.

and click OK. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 13 Using the same method. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. Curtain Systems. in the Type Selector. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. In this exercise.8 Using the method you just learned. select Curtain Panels. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. select Sloped Glazing. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. click Create Roof. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. and Walls. 12 On the Options Bar. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families.

3 In the Type Selector. verify that Select Multiple is selected. under Views (all).Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. 4 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Options Bar.rvt. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. 5 Press CTRL. click Create System. click Curtain System by Face. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 .

8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing .7 Using the same method. select the blended form on the in-place mass.

9 On the Options Bar. Creating Curtain Systems | 643 . 11 Using the same method. 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass). click Create System.

you created curtain systems on non-planar faces.rvt. you change the size of an existing mass family. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. In this exercise.12 Click Modify to exit the command. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing . and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise.

and click OK. Floors. under Views (all).1 In the Project Browser. enter 30000. double-click Site. 2 On the View menu. 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. clear Exclude Design Options. and Walls. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Curtain Panels. click Modify. Next. and then click OK. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 3 On the Model Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. Roofs. for Width. and click (Element Properties). 6 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. Curtain Systems. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 . 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. under Floor Plans. 4 Select the box mass family as shown.

10 Open the 3D view to see the result. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. 12 On the View Control Bar. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Views (all). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. In the next steps. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 11 In the Project Browser. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown.

click OK. click (Default 3D View). press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . click Remake. 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. Also. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. you want to select the smaller one.TIP To select the curtain wall. 17 Select the roof as shown. 16 On the View toolbar. 14 On the Options Bar.

648 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click Remake. 19 Select the arc dome curtain system.18 On the Options Bar. click Remake.

you changed the size of an existing mass family. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing.20 In the Project Browser. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. In this exercise. under Schedules/Quantities. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. 1 Open the 3D view.rvt.

3 In the Project Browser.Massing only. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click All to select all categories. 9 Select Mass. under 3D Views.The 3D view now shows only the building shell. and click OK. 8 Click None to clear the selection. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. right-click {3D}. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 6 On the Model Categories tab. 4 Rename the view 3D .

you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. This concludes the massing tutorial. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. to the building shell. You might create the model shown.In this exercise. such as columns and an extruded roof. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 . If desired.

652 .

Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. the host group is also updated automatically. all instances in the building model are updated. and typical office layouts. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. Creating. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. hotel rooms. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. In another exercise. 653 . When you make changes to a nested group. You can also nest groups within other groups. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. In this tutorial.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. In this exercise. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. For example. place. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. By grouping objects. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. you also simplify the modification process. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. you add the new model group to a previously created group. or with those working on a different project. and modify repetitive units. After you create a model group. you not only simplify their placement. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. The new group is considered nested within the host group. Modifying. You mirror one instance of the group. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit.

click Training Files. 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. expand Views (all). 2 Click in the drawing area. expand Floor Plans.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. and double-click First Floor. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter ZR.

click (Group).3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. 4 On the Edit toolbar. enter Typical Kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 655 . and click OK. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog.

8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Modify. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. 7 On the Design Bar.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. select the center control for the group origin. 656 | Chapter 18 Grouping .

and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. under Groups. and click Create Instance. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. 12 On the Design Bar. expand Model.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 . right-click Typical Kitchen.

658 | Chapter 18 Grouping . The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 15 On the Options Bar. click (Mirror). NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. clear Copy.14 On the Edit toolbar.

19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. Creating and Placing a Group | 659 . and on the Edit toolbar.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. click (Rotate).

one mirrored. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping . as shown.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. and one rotated. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 20 On the Design Bar. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Modify.

Save the training file 22 On the File menu. and click Save. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. you make changes to an instance of a group. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. click Save As. press TAB to highlight the wall. and click to select it.rvt. Modifying a Group In this exercise.rvt. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. When you finish editing. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Modifying a Group | 661 .

(Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click member to group instance. select the element. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping .).).). click Modify. and click to select the door. 8 On the Design Bar.3 Click (Group Member. press TAB. 7 Click (Group Member. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.). press TAB. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. 4 Move the cursor over the door. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click to select the wall. NOTE To display an excluded element.

clear Tag on Placement. 10 In the Type Selector. 14 In the Type Selector.127mm. click Wall. select Basic Wall : Generic . move the cursor to the left. 12 On the Design Bar. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. click Door. 15 On the Options Bar. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. Modifying a Group | 663 . and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. All other elements in the model are grayed out. click Edit Group. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening.17 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. move the cursor up. click Modify. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 21 On the Options Bar. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. 23 In the drawing area. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . In edit group mode.

enter 1000. click Modify. Nesting Groups | 665 . and on the Options Bar. click 28 For Base Offset. which acts as the host. 26 Select the opening. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. enter 2134. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. (Element Properties). for Unconnected Height. and click OK.25 On the Design Bar. created in an earlier lesson. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. Nesting Groups In this exercise. click Finish. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Constraints. you add the Typical Kitchen group. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 On the group editor toolbar.

m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. click (Add to Group). 5 In the drawing area. in the Project Browser. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. click Edit Group.rvt. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping .Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. select the Typical Kitchen group. 4 On the group editor toolbar. double-click First Floor. under Floor Plans. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 3 On the Options Bar.

and each of the bifold doors. double-click Second Floor. select the wall between the folding doors. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. 7 On the group editor toolbar.6 Press TAB. under Floor Plans. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. 8 In the Project Browser. click Finish. Nesting Groups | 667 .

2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. under Floor Plans. and filled regions. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. such as text. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. such as door and window tags.rvt. you add door tags to a group. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. double-click First Floor.

6 Move the cursor down and to the left. 7 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail Group | 669 . click Finish Sketch. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. and select a point below the left elevator. 4 On the Options Bar.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click to draw a rectangular region. click Filled Region.

9 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Edit toolbar. click to add an arc leader. click (Group). enter Elevator Lobby Tile. and select the text note and the filled region.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. and click OK. click Text. click Modify. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 16 In the drawing area. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. as shown. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. 12 Enter Tile. and on the Design Bar.

21 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans.18 On the Design Bar. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 . click Modify. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. under Groups. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. expand Detail. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. 20 In the Project Browser. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. double-click Second Floor. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. 22 On the Design Bar. and click Create Instance. Because the detail group contains variables.

m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. click Modify. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. as shown.manner that a drawing component can be added. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. 5 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. clear Leader. double-click First Floor.

double-click Second Floor.7 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select Door Tags. click Check None. click (Group). 9 On the Edit toolbar. Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . click (Filter Selection). for Attached Detail Group Name. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. 11 In the Project Browser. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. 8 In the Filter dialog. under Floor Plans. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog.

Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. therefore. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. When you load the group from the library into a new project. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. and click OK. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. 16 On the Design Bar. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. click Modify. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping .13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. 14 On the Options Bar. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. click Place Detail.

5 In the New Project dialog. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and click Create Instance. 12 On the Design Bar. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . In this case. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. click Desktop.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). and click Save Group. and click Open. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. 3 For File name. under Groups\Model. browse to the Desktop. for Create new. click OK. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. verify that Project is selected. accept the default template file.rvt. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. and expand Model. A warning dialog displays. and click Save. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. and click OK. verify that Same as group name is selected. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. select 2 Bedroom Unit.rvt. click Modify. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. expand Groups.

676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 17 On the Design Bar. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and the link is removed. click Remove Link. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Use Existing. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. verify that Attached Details is selected only. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. select the linked Revit model. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. and click OK.rvt. 18 In the Project Browser.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. click Modify. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate.rvt file is added as a link to the project. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. click OK. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. 24 In the message dialog. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Bind. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. 20 On the Options Bar. click Link. click Training Files. expand Revit Links. When a group is converted to a link. and on the Options Bar. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. 23 In the confirmation dialog.

you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. and then modify the data. In the final exercises. Using Site Tools In this lesson. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. You add property lines manually. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. islands.Site 19 In this tutorial. and walkways. you add a building pad to the site. convert the data to a table. 677 . You add subregions to the area to define parking areas.

rvt. click Toposurface. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. Using the first method. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. This project file was created using the default metric template. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_First_Project. expand Floor Plans. In the second part of this exercise. and double-click Site. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Options Bar. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. 678 | Chapter 19 Site . expand Views (all).The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. and click Site. right-click in the Design Bar. you create a toposurface using two different methods. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. 3 On the Design Bar. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. click Point.

The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. Use the following illustration as a reference. Creating a Toposurface | 679 . A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration.

12000mm. and click OK. 12 On the Settings menu. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm. 15000mm. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. under Additional Contours.8 On the Options Bar. 680 | Chapter 19 Site . and 18000mm absolute elevations. click Site Settings. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. enter 1500mm. under Increment. Use the following illustration as a reference. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. click Finish Surface. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. 11 On the Design Bar.

click Modify. click (Default 3D View).This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. click to view it at various angles. enter 1000mm. 15 On the View Control Bar. on the Standard toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. Creating a Toposurface | 681 . expand Elevations (Building Elevation). (SteeringWheels). modify the level names and elevations. click to delete it. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click the elevation value. 19 On the Design Bar. Before importing the contour data. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. 18 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. 14 On the View toolbar. 16 On the View toolbar. under Views (all). and double-click South.

click Yes. double-click Site. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Click Open. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. and click OK. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. under Floor Plans. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. click Training Files. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . and press ENTER. Until it is exploded. click Pin Position. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. under Views (all). and press ENTER. rename the level Basement. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. 30 On the Edit menu. For Colors. 29 Select the imported topography. click Modify. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.21 Click the Level 2 text. select Specify. select Preserve. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. it is considered an import symbol. 28 On the Design Bar. Verify that Current view only is not selected. 23 Click the Level 1 text. rename the level Base Site Elevation. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. For Layers. 24 In the Project Browser.

31 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. When you select the import symbol. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 34 Under Visibility. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. clear Elevations. click Visibility/Graphics. click Toposurface. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. and then click OK. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. select it. click the Annotation Categories tab. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 36 On the Design Bar. when the edges highlight. Creating a Toposurface | 683 . 32 On the View menu. click Modify. clear C_INDX.

name the project Site-in progress. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. 42 On the View toolbar. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. you add property lines using two methods. Adding Property Lines on page 684. and click Save.rvt. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 39 On the Design Bar.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. 40 On the View toolbar. click (SteeringWheels). Using the first method. this project file is required in its current state. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. click (Default 3D View). 684 | Chapter 19 Site . click Finish Surface. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. Using the second method.

you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. On the Design Bar. click Lines. do so before continuing. Adding Property Lines | 685 .rvt. Site-in progress. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. Click Modify. select Create property lines by sketching. double-click Site. 4 On the Design Bar. click Lines. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. under Floor Plans. click Property Line. Select and delete the right vertical line. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.

7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. when they highlight. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. 6 On the Design Bar. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. and click OK. to delete them. select the lines. add an arc line on the right. click OK. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. 8 On the Options Bar. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . click 12 On the Design Bar. 9 In the warning dialog. click Property Line. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. A warning dialog is displayed. on the Standard toolbar. click OK. click Finish Sketch. select Edit Table.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool.

enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. 16 Click OK. click to place the property lines. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. 15 Starting in Row #1. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. Adding Property Lines | 687 . This means there is no gap in the property lines.14 In the Property Lines dialog. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. If the gap is not closed. 19 In the Tags dialog.

NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. and click OK. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 23 On the View menu. In the next exercise. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. click Training Files. clear Leader. 27 On the Options Bar. and click Drafting. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. this project file is required in its current state. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. In this exercise. click Visibility/Graphics.20 Click Load. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog.dwg and click OK. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . you created two sets of property lines. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. click the Imported Categories tab. The tags display more prominently in this view. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. click to place it.rfa. right-click in the Design Bar. 25 Under Visibility. click Tag ➤ By Category. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. In the final step. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. 30 On the View Control Bar. Before adding property line segment tags. 22 In the Tags dialog.

Under Line Color. select Topography. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. In the Object Styles dialog. click Object Styles.0mm. Under Subcategory. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. 7 Click OK. select a shade of Brown. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. Site-in progress. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . and click OK. 2 On the Settings menu. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. 10 Under Additional Contours.rvt. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. Under Range Type. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. click New. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. select Single Value. select Working Contour. select Dash dot. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. enter the name Working Contour. under Contour Line Display. click Site Settings. Under Line Pattern. enter 1000. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. for Subcategory. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start.

you created a new object style subcategory for topography. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. In the next exercise. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. parking areas. and islands. such as material. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close.11 Click OK. and islands. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. The next exercise requires a new training file. The object style subcategory. In this exercise. you create subregions in order to define roads. Working Contour. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. you create topographic subregions to define roads. parking areas.

sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. try to replicate the location and proportion. click Subregion. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 . use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. 2 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. click Lines. and open Metric\m_Site. Although the exact dimensions are not important.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt.

enter Parking for Name. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. click Properties.NOTE In the Metric training file. 6 In the Materials dialog. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and click to open the Materials dialog. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar.Tarmacadam for Name. 8 On the Design Bar. 692 | Chapter 19 Site . you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. select Site . When you finish the sketch in a later step. under Materials and Finishes. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click the value for Material. under Identity Data. and click OK.

NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. expand Schedules/Quantities. 12 On the View Control Bar. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. As you create new subregions. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions.Tarmacadam. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Edit Boundary.9 On the View Control Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. double-click Site. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. and double-click Topography Schedule. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. they display within this schedule. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. under Floor Plans.

694 | Chapter 19 Site . you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. 22 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Lines. 20 On the View Control Bar. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Site. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Subregion. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. under Floor Plans. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. double-click Topography Schedule. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. 18 In the Project Browser. Delete overlapping lines. Within each subregion. Notice that the project area has increased. 16 On the Design Bar. In this training project.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 On the View Control Bar. enter Island . Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. under Materials and Finishes. select Site . use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. 26 In the Materials dialog. 24 On the Design Bar. click Properties. Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 .23 In the upper-right parking area. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 On the Design Bar.Grass for Name.Grass for Name. click the value for Material. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Topography Schedule. and click OK. and click to open the Materials dialog. under Identity Data. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. 30 In the Project Browser.

Notice that the schedule has been updated. You must sketch each region separately. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . under Schedules/Quantities. 35 On the Design Bar. Name each region Island Grass. under Floor Plans. double-click Topography Schedule. click Lines. and apply the material Site .31 In the Project Browser.Grass. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. Name the subregion Walkway. double-click Site. click Subregion. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. 34 On the Design Bar. and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ . double-click Site. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. 32 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.walkway.

If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. 38 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. 37 On the Design Bar.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. Notice that the schedule has been updated. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . under Schedules/Quantities. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. double-click Topography Schedule. there is still only one toposurface.

you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. double-click Site. Grading the Toposurface on page 698.rvt. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . under Floor Plans. 2 Select the toposurface. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Site tutorial-in progress. name the project Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. this project file is required in its current state. and click Save. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. When you use the grading tool.

Grading the Toposurface | 699 . RELATED For more information regarding phasing. and click Select and Edit. 6 On the Design Bar. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. Using Phasing on page 761. see the tutorial. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. select Copy Internal Points. under Phasing. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. 8 Select the topographic surface. click Modify. A warning dialog is displayed.3 On the Options Bar. select Existing for Phase Created. and click OK. click (Element Properties). click Graded Region. 5 On the Design Bar. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface.

Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. 10 Press DELETE. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area.Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. 700 | Chapter 19 Site .

12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration.Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. demolished. 11 On the View Control Bar. Grading the Toposurface | 701 . and new. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. 17 On the Design Bar. click Finish Surface. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. click (Default 3D View). 19 On the View Control Bar. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. click Point.13 Press DELETE. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. 18 On the View toolbar. 702 | Chapter 19 Site .

and click OK. under Phasing. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. and click OK. 23 Select the toposurface. specify New Construction for Phase. only the original toposurface displays. you can delete it. click View Properties.20 On the View toolbar. click to view it at various angles. you create a building pad. Only the graded topography displays. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . under Phasing. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. specify Existing for Phase. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Therefore. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. When you add a building pad. this project file is required in its current state. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. click View Properties. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. and delete it. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. (SteeringWheels). 24 On the View menu. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display.

NOTE By default. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Lines.rvt.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Pad. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 2 On the View Control Bar. the Pick Walls command is active. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. 6 On the Design Bar. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. If you have an existing building model. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. click Finish Sketch. Site tutorial-in progress.

see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. 7 On the View Control Bar. 9 On the View toolbar. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save.TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. Adding Site Components on page 706. 8 On the View toolbar. Notice the new building pad. click (SteeringWheels). For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. this project file is required in its current state. click (Default 3D View). Adding a Building Pad | 705 . 11 Proceed to the next exercise. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.

5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. under Floor Plans. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. Site tutorial-in progress.90 deg. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. click Parking Component. 3 In the Type Selector. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm .Adding Site Components In this exercise.rvt. 706 | Chapter 19 Site . and select the parking space. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.

Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. 8 On the View toolbar.NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. 7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. click (Default 3D View). Adding Site Components | 707 .

12 In the Type Selector. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. Notice the new parking spaces. 708 | Chapter 19 Site . choose any tree type. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. click Site Component.9 On the View toolbar. click (SteeringWheels). under Floor Plans. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. double-click Site. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.

the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. click (SteeringWheels). and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. Adding Site Components | 709 . 14 On the View toolbar.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. 15 On the View toolbar. In the following illustration. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. click (Default 3D View).

710 | Chapter 19 Site . 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click Apply. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. this project file is required in its current state. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. click Apply. Site tutorial-in progress.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. under Floor Plans. and click OK. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710. double-click Site. click Tag All Not Tagged. 5 On the View menu. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. click Hidden Line. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees.rvt.

You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. as shown: 10 Using the same method. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 . add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. outside of the site. In the following exercise. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. Click again to the left to position the leader. to position the shoulder of the leader. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. Click up and to the left. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar.

13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. and select the 3 spot dimensions. click Modify. 12 Press and hold CTRL. 712 | Chapter 19 Site . 11 On the Design Bar.■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive.

this project file is required in its current state. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 . you create a parking schedule. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.■ Clear Leader. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713. 14 On the Design Bar. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify.

13 In the Parking Schedule. Site tutorial-in progress. and click OK. double-click Site. select Parking for Category. The parking schedule is displayed. under Views (all). select Mark. 5 Under Available fields. and click OK. select Mark. enter Size. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Window menu. under Floor Plans. 12 In the Site plan. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. If necessary. 4 Under Available fields.rvt. click Tile. 11 On the Window menu.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Close Hidden Windows. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . 8 Under Fields. and under Heading. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 7 Under Fields. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. and under Heading. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. number the first three spaces consecutively. 6 Click the Formatting tab. select Type. select Type. and click Add. enter Space. click Schedule/Quantities. and click Add. under Space. click the Fields tab.

Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. 14 In the Parking Schedule. finish numbering the remaining spaces. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 . the selected space highlights in the Site plan. under Space. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. This allows you to know which space you are numbering.

716 .

You can enable Worksharing for any project. floors. All other team members can view this workset. 717 . Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. A workset is a collection of building elements. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. called Worksharing.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. go to the Worksets dialog. they cannot make changes to it. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. select the desired workset. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. however. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. such as walls. When you are working on a shared project. and so on. you must first enable Worksharing. stairs. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. Elements specific to a view. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. Using Worksharing. doors. you specify an active workset. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. To make a workset editable. and click Editable. After the project is shared. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. Working in a shared project In a shared project. The first time you activate worksets within a project. In this tutorial. such as annotations and dimensions. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. use Element Borrowing. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you.

Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. such as a tenant interior. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. you can select which worksets are open or closed. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. In a multi-story structure. When setting up Worksharing. Instead. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. In the next exercise. After learning the fundamentals. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. Team size 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. In the lessons and exercises that follow.Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project.

Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. Regardless of the default setting. You should have at least one workset for each person. As new members create worksets for their own use. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. for a typical project. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. In most projects. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. Experience has shown that. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. each team member has control over a portion of the design. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. Team member roles Typically. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. On this tab. When creating the new worksets. When you create a new workset. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member.You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. designers work in teams. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . By subdividing the project based on these task roles. and View worksets. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. not including the Project Standards. Shared Levels and Grids. with each assigned a specific functional task. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility.

Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. you should then save to your local file. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. your changes propagate to the entire team. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. you can select which workset is active. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. within the local file. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. When you save to the central file. the file is saved as the central file. you make that workset editable by you. if a workset named Interior was created. This is called “Selective Open. Generally. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. On the Options Bar. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. your changes are saved. however. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. When you save to the central file. After saving to the central file. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. When you save locally (to your local file). Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. However. Therefore. As you work. For example. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. proceeds as usual. This makes them available to other team members. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. When finished or at regular intervals. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them.

using VPN. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. and then save the local file. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. save to the central file.Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. reload the latest changes from the central file. In this conceptual exercise. When working remotely. In this situation. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. make any required worksets editable. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. and make that workset editable. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. for instance. you should check out the Materials workset. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. To do this. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. if you know who checked out the required workset. Alternatively. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. In this instance. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. you work no differently then you would in the office. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence.

you enable Worksharing within an existing project. and open Common\c_Worksets. Your username displays as the present owner. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset.rvt. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. click Training Files. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. and notice all are editable by you. click Worksets. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. under Show.In the next exercise. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. The Worksets dialog displays." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. 3 In the Worksets dialog. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File.

The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. and double-click Level 1. clear Visible by default in all views. In this simple training project. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. You do. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. another is assigned the interior layout. 16 In the drawing area. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. imagine four users including yourself. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. For example. you can rename the default workset. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. expand Floor Plans. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. Rather than create a new workset for these elements.When you enable worksharing. currently named Workset1. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. Project Standards. 14 In the Worksets dialog. however. click New. select Workset1. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. 9 Click New. In this case. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. For training purposes. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . 13 In the Rename dialog. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. a small number of team members are working on the building model. expand Views (all). Therefore. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. Because the interior walls appear in many views. click OK. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. ■ 5 Under Show. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. type the name Exterior Shell. Only User-Created worksets should display. 8 Click OK. and Views. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. and click OK. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. 11 In the Worksets dialog. 12 Click Rename. clear Families. When you initially activate Worksharing. it is better to make them visible by default. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. In this training file. you should turn off Visible by default in all views.

and click OK. under Identity Data.17 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. 26 On the View menu. select Interior Layout for Workset. 23 Select all of the interior elements. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. stairs. click Visibility/Graphics. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. 19 Click OK. under Identity Data. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. 21 On the Options Bar. click . and walls. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. including the interior doors. under Identity Data. and click OK. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. click . 29 Click OK. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . click . select Interior Layout for Workset. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. 20 Select one of the interior walls. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. click the Worksets tab.

43 Click OK. click Close. click Non Editable. 44 On the File menu. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. under Floor Plans. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. 39 Click Save. under Views (all). 32 Select Interior Layout. 30 On the View menu. 35 On the Options Bar. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. click the Worksets tab. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. make sure you remember the location of this central file. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. and click OK. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. Now that you have created the central file. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . If any interior elements remain. select all of the interior elements of the building model. click Save As. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. double-click Level 2. 41 In the Worksets dialog. and click OK. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. 42 On the right side of the dialog. you enabled Worksharing on a project. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. 38 In the Save As dialog. click Worksets. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. select Interior Layout for Workset. 34 In the drawing area. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. under Identity Data. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. click . select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. In this exercise. 33 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need.

Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 2 In the Open dialog. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. check out worksets. please do so before continuing. click Worksets. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. you create your local file. You have created a local file which is for your use only. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . select all the User-Created worksets. click Options. and double-click Level 1. Next. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). 7 In the Save As dialog. 13 On the Window menu. and click OK. select the central file. make modifications to the building model. In addition. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. If you have not yet completed the exercise. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. In this case. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and select Specify. and click Save. 4 Click Open. 6 On the File menu. 11 In the Worksets dialog. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 15 In the Project Browser. select Interior Layout for Name. select Interior Layout. click Save As. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. 12 Click OK. click Open. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. Before working on the model. and select Yes for Editable. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. and click OK. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1.

click Worksets. click . 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. 21 On the Options Bar. and click OK. On the Options Bar. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. In the Worksets dialog. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. however. Verify that it is cleared. 24 Click OK. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. 22 Click OK. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. click Modify. under Identity Data. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. 20 Under Constraints. click . If this is selected. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. Because this element is not owned by another user. In this case. 18 On the Options Bar. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. If it was owned by another user. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. notice the Editable Only option. you can still edit this wall.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 23 On the File menu. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset.

click Door. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. click Wall. The precise location is not important. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. 34 In the Type Selector. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 31 On the Design Bar. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Basic Wall: Interior .Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. 29 In the Type Selector. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. 26 Delete the door. click Modify. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide.126mm Partition (2-hr).

You modified the building model. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. and reload the latest changes. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. and save locally immediately afterward. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. you should relinquish all worksets. If you have not yet completed these exercises. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. you created your local file. it is recommended. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. click Save to Central. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. a tooltip. Throughout the process. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. Whenever you save. In this exercise. In addition. For training purposes. add two door openings into the rooms you created. In this particular case. make elements editable. each user must check out worksets. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. please do so before continuing. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. At the end of a work session.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. leave this file open in its current state. displays the workset as well as the element type. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. By default. Borrowed Elements is selected. two users access the central file through a network connection. When working in your local file. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. you should perform regular saves. save to central. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. which matches the information in the Status Bar. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. checked out worksets.

730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . under Username. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. click Options. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. and click OK. specifically sequenced. instructions are staggered. 4 Click the General Tab and. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. click Worksets. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. skip the following section.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. This is a system setting. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. and click Save. 12 In the Save As dialog. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. enter User 2. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. 15 On the File menu. and click OK. select the central file. click Options. one user has already created a local file. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. This file is for your use only. You now have a local copy of the project. In the following section of this exercise. 3 On the Settings menu. click Open. consider that person to be User 1. User 2: Create a local file. and select Specify. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. click Save As. return to the Settings dialog. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 11 On the File menu. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 9 Click Open. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. select all the User-Created worksets. In addition. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise.rvt. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 7 In the Open dialog. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. and proceed to Creating a local copy. and select Yes for Editable. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. For training purposes. and click OK.

22 Select the Interior Layout workset. User 1: Check out worksets. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. 19 On the File menu.You are now the owner of that workset. 24 In the Project Browser. 17 Click OK. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. 27 On the File menu.” 29 Click OK. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. expand Floor Plans. it becomes the active workset. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. modify the building model. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. select the lower exterior wall. If you only have one workset checked out. click Worksets. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. and double-click Level 1. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. click Save to Central. expand Views (all). 23 Click OK. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. and select Yes for Editable. expand Views (all). If it is not open. open it now. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser.

you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. Click Yes. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. Before adding any furniture. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. right-click Level 1. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. The changes User 2 made are apparent. click Reload Latest. click Save to Central. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. 45 In the Rename View dialog. 46 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click OK. When you save to central. User 1: Reload latest worksets. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects .A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. select Yes for Editable. right-click Copy of Level 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. 43 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. under Floor Plans. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central.” 35 Click OK. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. click Worksets. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. 41 On the File menu. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. click Save to Central. and click OK. 33 On the File menu. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central.” 39 Click OK. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). However. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. you should create a furniture plan view. 44 In the Project Browser. 37 On the File menu. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. 42 Select Furniture Layout.

the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. 49 On the Design Bar.” 55 Click OK. rather than Families. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. Therefore. click Rename. 60 In the Rename dialog. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. such as Wall Types. 66 On the File menu. and click inside any room.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. select Project Standards. and click OK. click Reload Latest. 62 On the File menu. click Save to Central. 63 In the Worksets dialog.200mm. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. and click OK. enter Exterior Wall . choose any desk. click Save to Central. click Component. click Visibility/Graphics. 53 On the File menu. click Edit/New. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. 50 On the View menu. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. the Visible by default option was not selected. 61 Click OK 2 times. NOTE System families. are placed under Project Standards. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. click the Worksets tab. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. 48 In the Type Selector. click Modify. and click Element Properties. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. under Show. 65 Click OK. click Worksets. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 . 54 In the Save to Central dialog. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK.

70 On the File menu. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. 3 In the Save As dialog. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. and click OK. There are specific instructions for each user. This exercise requires two users and. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. throughout this training. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2.rvt. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). leave this file open in its current state. Each user must have network access to the central file. At the appropriate point in this exercise. select Reload Latest. leave this file open in its current state. and published their changes back to the central file. click Save As. Checking out worksets. In the final exercise of this tutorial. and these problems are rectified. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. and save 69 On the File menu. finished the previous workset exercises. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. Each user checked out worksets. User 1: Reload latest. you need to set up your central and local files. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. In subsequent steps.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. click Training Files. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. modified the building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. As each of you work. select Save to Central. you save the training file as a central file. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. click Options. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. select the following. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. and still have your local files open. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to.

7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. Set the Username to User 2. 6 On the File menu. click Options. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and click OK. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. and click Save. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. click Save As. and click OK. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. and reset the Username to your computer login name. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. click Options. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. click Save As. and click OK. 17 On the File menu. and click Save. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. This is the local file for User 1. 5 Click Save. select the central file. Next. On the Settings menu. 13 In the Open dialog. 18 In the Save As dialog. click Options. click Open. This is a system setting. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 12 On the File menu. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. and select Specify. return to the Settings dialog. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. The central file should still be open. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. and click OK. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. In addition. 15 Click Open. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . 9 In the File Save Options dialog. 8 In the Save As dialog. and click OK. select Make this a Central File after save. 19 In the File Save Options dialog.4 In the File Save Options dialog. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2.

User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. and then click OK. 24 Under Active Workset. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. select the Interior Layout workset. 26 In the Worksets dialog. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. under Floor Plans. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. click Worksets. and click Editing Requests. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. 27 Under Active Workset. You are now the owner of that workset. double-click Level 1. click the File menu. select them. select Interior Layout. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . At this point. select Exterior Shell. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Worksets dialog. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. 30 On the left exterior wall. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. and select Yes for Editable. if any User-Created worksets are not open. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. 29 On the Options Bar. click Worksets. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. and select Yes for Editable. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. and then click OK. After you submit the request. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. verify that Editable Only is cleared. Afterwards. You are now the owner of that workset. and click Open. select the second window from the top.

click Check Now. In this multi-user exercise. select the request submitted by User 2. A message informs you that your request has been granted. and the other user granted it. select Save to Central. and notice the window is in the new location. to Local. and click OK. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. and close 39 On the File menu. In this case. 35 Click Grant. select the following. 36 Click Close. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . User 1 and 2: Save to Central. 38 Click OK. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. click Close.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. you requested permission to edit the element.

738 .

you create multiple design schemes within a single project file.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. Using design options. For example. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. In addition. In this tutorial. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. After you and the client agree on the final design. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. 739 . you can have multiple sets of design options. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. At any time in the design process. and each option set can have multiple schemes.

the roof and structure systems must work together. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. click New. each is constructed for interchangeability. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. and delete the unwanted options from the project. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. therefore. TIP In this exercise. you can edit it. 2 In the Design Options dialog. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. The client has asked you to create various options. In the final exercise of this lesson. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. After you create a design option.rvt. you set up multiple design option sets. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. With the second option.In this particular case. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. the only available command is to create a new option set. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. under Option Set. each with multiple design options. In the first exercise in this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. and open Metric\m_Urban_House. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. make your final design decision. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. In the second exercise. click Training Files. you design each of the structural options. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials.

you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). expand Views (all). the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. click 12 On the Options Bar. click Column. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. and click Close. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. In this case. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. select: ■ ■ ■ . or add a dimension string between the columns. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. By selecting Multiple. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. add three columns. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. TIP To center the middle column. 9 On the Design Bar.3 Select Option 1 (primary). 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. click Edit Selected. 4 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. 5 On the View menu. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 7 In the Type Selector. click Modify. and the third column centered between the two. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . 11 On the Edit toolbar.

When you are finished. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . In the following illustration. using the same technique. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. they are difficult to see in this view. A copy of the three selected columns is added. 18 On the View toolbar. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. click . TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse.14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. Because of the size of the columns. 17 Zoom out and.

Notice the 12 columns that you added. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. Use the following illustration as a guide. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . Adding a beam is a two-click process. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. In it. 21 In the Type Selector. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. Zoom in on the upper right column. The second click specifies the end of the beam. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. select Round Bar : 50mm. Next. click Modify. click Beam. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. The first click specifies the beam start point. you add the beams that span the columns. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. under Floor Plans. and click at its center to set the beam start point. double-click TOP OF CORE. 23 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 19 In the Project Browser.

select: ■ ■ ■ . click . 30 On the View toolbar. 744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 28 Zoom out. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch.25 On the Edit toolbar. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. and select the center of the column to add a copy. click 26 On the Options Bar. move down to the next set of columns. and click the center point. zoom into the left column.

name the option Louvers. 46 Under Option. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). 36 In the Rename dialog. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. click Rename. click Rename. under Option Set. select Option 1 (primary). enter Structure for New. under Option. and click OK. click Rename. click New. 40 In the Rename dialog. click Rename.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. 41 Under Option Set. 45 Under Roofing. 32 In the Design Options dialog. and click OK. 37 Select Option 2 and. click New. not a new option set. under Option. There should now be two roofing design options. under Option. click New. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. 38 In the Rename dialog. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. and click OK. enter Roofing for New. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. 33 Click Finish Editing. under Option. enter Brackets for New. and click OK. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. and click OK. enter Beam for New. 43 In the Rename dialog. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. under Option Set. 34 In the Design Options dialog. click Rename.

746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . under Structure. When finished. you create the second design option. 53 In the Project Browser. 48 Under Option. double-click ROOF TERRACE. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. 52 Click Close. 51 Under Edit. click Rename. name the option Sunscreen. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. select Edit Selected. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display.47 Under Roofing. under Floor Plans. select Option 2. and click OK. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. select Beam. This allows you to more easily manage the project. 50 In the Design Options dialog. Under Now Editing. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. it will resemble the following illustration.

click Align. The second click represents the plane that is moved. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. 58 On the Tools menu. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. Refer to the following illustration. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. 56 In the Type Selector.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select M_Roof Beam. click Component. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 .

The second click represents the move end point. click Modify. 62 Select the beam and. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . The first click sets the move start point.60 After aligning the beam. 61 On the Design Bar. Click to indicate the end point of the move. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. on the Edit toolbar. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown.

NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. Notice that even before you close the dialog. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. name the file. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. click Finish Editing. 66 On the View toolbar. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. That is because the brackets option is set to primary.rvt. and click Save. click . Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . 70 On the File menu. you need this file in its current state. 67 On the Tools menu. which is visible by default. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. 69 Click Close. click Save As. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 68 In the Design Options dialog.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. m_Urban_House-in progress.

With the second option. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. and double-click TOP OF CORE. The first option. open it now. 2 On the Tools menu. you design each of the roofing options. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. a Louver system. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . In the next exercise. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. under Roofing. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. click Edit Selected. delete them after the rafter is in place. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. Under Now Editing. click Component. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. 3 In the Design Options dialog. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. expand Floor Plans. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. If you need to add dimensions. 10 Referring to the following illustration. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. 8 In the Type Selector. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. you set up multiple design option sets. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. 5 Click Close. the other for beams. 6 In the Project Browser. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. select Louvers (primary). 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. do so now.rvt. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. Sunscreen. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. each with multiple design options to pick from. The second roofing system. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. expand Views (all). After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise.In this exercise. 4 Under Edit.

12 Select the rafter you added previously. enter 11750 mm for Length. 15 On the Edit menu. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Select 2nd for Move To. click Array. Enter 5 for Number. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 16 On the Options Bar. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. click Modify. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Select Constrain.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Other. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. click . Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 .

when the listening dimension displays. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . enter 990. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. and press ENTER.

24 In the Element Properties dialog. Select Constrain. click the Edit menu. and click OK. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . 27 For the array starting point. 20 In the Type Selector. Select 2nd for Move To. 26 On the Options Bar. click Component. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. and click Array. and select the louver you just placed. click Modify. 22 On the Design Bar. enter 5475 mm for Length. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. under Other. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. Enter 34 for Number. 23 On the Options Bar.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. 25 With the louver still selected.

enter 300. click . Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart. 29 On the View toolbar. and. and press Enter. when the listening dimension displays.28 Move the cursor vertically downward. 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .

expand Elevations. click Lines. Click OK. 31 In the Design Options dialog. 39 On the Design Bar. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. 30 On the Tools menu. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. 33 Under Editing. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. click Edit Selected. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. select Sunscreen. Therefore. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name.The louver roof system is complete. under Edit. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. click Finish Editing. under Roofing. In this case. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . and then click Close. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. and click OK. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. 40 On the Options Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. and double-click West. 34 In the Project Browser. click .

NOTE As you sketch the arcs. then the center arc.This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. click . The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. the top of the next column on the right. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. 48 On the Design Bar. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. You will fix this in a later step. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. click Trim/Extend. Under Constraints. The arcs should connect. click Properties. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. and the third point defines the arc. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. 49 On the View toolbar. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . then you can modify it through the dimension. 46 On the Tools menu. 43 On the Design Bar. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. The first two points define the ends of the line. 45 Click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. 41 Select the top of the left column. Under Constraints. Select the right arc.

Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. you designed each of the roofing options. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). The second roofing system. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. do so now. After exploring the combinations.The louver roof system is complete. 4 In the Project Browser. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. you need this file in its current state. and click Rename. In this exercise. and delete the discarded design options. under Views (all). and click OK. The first option. 3 In the Rename View dialog. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. Managing Design Options In this exercise. 2 In the Project Browser. tertiary. expand 3D Views. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. a Louver system. secondary. under Edit. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. 50 On the Tools menu. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. right-click {3D}. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. enter Primary Option. 51 In the Design Options dialog. under 3D Views. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. make it part of the building model. and click Duplicate. and then click Close. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Finish Editing. Managing Design Options | 757 . you select a design. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. Sunscreen. and last options. click Save. 52 On the File menu. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view.

click the Design Options tab. under 3D Views. 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 9 Click OK. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. under Views (all). 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 11 On the View menu. click the Design Options tab. double-click Primary Option. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. double-click Secondary Option. 7 On the View menu. under 3D Views. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. under Views (all).5 Right-click each of the copies. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. click Visibility/Graphics. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 10 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

At this point. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Tertiary Option. 19 On the View menu. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In your design options.14 In the Project Browser. In this case. click the Design Options tab. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. under Views (all). Managing Design Options | 759 . all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. under 3D Views. under Views (all). click the Design Options tab. under 3D Views. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. 15 On the View menu. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. double-click Last Option. and click OK. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. click Visibility/Graphics.

click Yes. In this exercise. double-click Primary Option. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. the beam option becomes part of the model. 29 Select Roofing. 27 In the alert dialog. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. 35 On the File menu. since you no longer need them. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 33 In the Design Options dialog. An alert is displayed. click Yes. The set is deleted. After exploring the combinations. select Make Primary. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. click Close. the current primaries are no longer options. you selected a design. This was the client choice for structural. 23 In the Design Options dialog. 26 Under Option Set. and deleted the discarded design options. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. Because the client has selected the design option. click Save. 25 Select Structure. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. 31 In the alert dialog. but should be accepted as part of the building model.22 On the Tools menu. click Delete. under Structure. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. click Accept Primary. click Delete to remove the views that used options. made it part of the building model. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 24 Under Option. select Beam. 30 Under Option Set.

You create new phases. In the second exercise.Project Phasing 22 In any project. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. demolish existing construction. and then add new building model elements. You create new phases. In the lesson and exercises that follow. In the second exercise. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. For the client. complete with schedules. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. demolish existing walls and doors. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. then add new walls and doors in a different location. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. This changes room definition and total building model area. 761 . You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases.

5 Select any of the exterior walls. click Project Units. under Phasing. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. under Phasing. 7 Click Cancel. When you create a new project. expand Views (all). they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. and double-click Level 1. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. define the units. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. click (Element Properties). As you add new elements to the building model. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Floor Plans. and open Common\c_Phasing. During the demolition and renovation process. you do not need to change the project units to metric. and click OK. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. In the left pane of the Open dialog. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. click Modify. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. regardless of phase. click Training Files. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. In the Element Properties dialog. If you wish to do so. 6 On the Options Bar.rvt. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. This means that all building model elements. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. go to the Settings menu. are visible in this view. 4 Click Cancel. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides.

Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. clear Door Tags. After you create the views. click Modify. click . you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. TIP If this were a multi-story building. 12 On the Options Bar. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. and click Rename. including the door tags. all of the building model elements. 16 In the Rename dialog. and click Rename. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. 10 On the Options Bar. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1. enter Level 1 . for Phase Created. right-click Level 1 .Existing. enter Level 1 . you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. Phasing Your Model | 763 . and click OK. and click OK. 11 In the Filter dialog. under Floor Plans.Demo. click (Filter Selection).Existing. 18 In the Project Browser. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. Because this is a phase-specific view. 20 In the Rename dialog. right-click Copy of Level 1 . select Existing. 19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Because this is a renovation project. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. under Phasing. 17 Click No. and click OK.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. After you release the mouse button. under Floor Plans. are highlighted in red. 14 On the Design Bar. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it.Existing.

26 In the Phasing dialog. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. In this case. under New. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. to which all the building model elements belong. new construction occurs after existing construction. under Floor Plans. click the Phase Filters tab. for Phase. 29 For Composite Plan. however. 24 In the Project Browser. There are five default phase filters. double-click Level 1 . a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. Because of this time relationship. and Temporary. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Phasing. On a logical time line. Existing. double-click Level 1 . you modify these settings. 21 In the Project Browser. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . Later in this exercise. You may need to zoom in to see this.Demo. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. 28 Under Filter Name. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. enter Composite Plan. Next. Phase status is time-dependent. 27 Click New. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. select Overridden. Notice that the line pattern is still gray.Existing. under Floor Plans. Demolished. and click OK. select Existing.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases.

double-click Level 1 . This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. 36 Using the same method. 39 In the Phasing dialog. 42 In the Project Browser. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. As you click each wall. under Cut ➤ Lines. 35 Click OK twice. select red. select the line style. double-click Level 1 .Existing. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue.31 Under Phase Status. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. select Demolished. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. Phasing Your Model | 765 . When you demolish the host. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. 32 In the Demolished row. There are two ways to demolish an element. click the value for Color. you demolish all elements hosted by it. or you can use the demolish tool. you begin demolition. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. under Floor Plans. click OK. select the interior walls one at a time. under Floor Plans.Demo. Next. click (Demolish). select a lighter blue. its display changes to a red dashed line. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. 34 In the Color dialog. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar.

under Phasing. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". click Wall.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). select Show Previous + New. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. 47 In the Type Selector. and click OK. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. 49 On the Design Bar.Demo. 50 In the Type Selector. 51 Add a door leading into each room.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Phasing. 53 Open Level 1 . for Phase Filter. and click OK. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The demolished walls no longer display. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . select Basic Wall: Interior .Existing. click Door. add a long horizontal wall. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. 52 Open Level 1 . for Phase Filter.

Phasing Your Model | 767 . 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 .Demo. All elements are displayed in this view. new is shown in blue. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. right-click Level 1 . 60 On the View toolbar. because the phase filter is set to Show All.New. click (Default 3D View). spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. which are displayed as red. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.New. regardless of phase. 61 On the View Control Bar. 59 Open Level 1 . The renovated building model plan is displayed. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). 62 If necessary. 57 In the Project Browser. and existing shows as half-tone.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. All room boundaries are phase-specific. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. define the units. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. click Training Files. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. If you wish to do so. If you wish to save this file. and double-click Level 1 . In the next exercise. and click OK. In this view. demolition. you can see the new walls added to the building model. 3 Open Level 1 . You can also see that the room quantities. As the renovation process continues. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. expand Floor Plans.New. you can do so at this time. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. 63 Close the file. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. click Project Units. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial.Existing. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Views (all). The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. Notice that this view is the original building model. sizes. In this view. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions.rvt. 2 Open Level 1 . In this exercise. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. therefore. you do not need to change the project units to metric. go to the Settings menu. the rooms change in both definition and size.Demo. and new construction. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing .

click Room Tag. 6 Open Level 1 . 13 Open Level 1 . 11 On the Design Bar. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. In the Phasing dialog. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. Use the following illustration as a guide. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.New. click Room. 10 Open Level 1 . click Modify. 5 Click OK.Demo. yet they have different room numbers.Existing. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. and maximize the view. click in each room as you move to the right. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Room. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. 9 On the Design Bar. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases.

add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. 16 In the Project Browser. expand Schedules/Quantities. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. 18 Open Room Schedule . In this case. View phase-specific room schedules.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. 17 On the Window menu. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. and double-click Room Schedule . You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. In addition. 20 Close the file. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction.New Construction. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . click Tile. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. The two schedule views tile. In this exercise. 19 On the Window menu. click Close Hidden Windows.Existing. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in.

In this tutorial. You position the building models on the site plan. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. performance. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. Comparison of alternatives on a site. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. and manage the links throughout the project. This maximizes efficiency. In the final lesson. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. 771 . modify their visibility. In these situations. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files.

NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model.Linking Building Models In this lesson. One building model is a condominium. modify their visibility. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. You link two building models to the project. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. and the other is a townhouse. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. You position the building models on the site.

8 Clear Read-only.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. 2 On the File menu.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. click Open. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. with write permission. c_Condo_Complex. ■ ■ Manual . however. click Open. Otherwise. Auto . 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Select c_Site.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. click Close. Click Open. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. RELATED See the lesson. c_Townhouse. you can do so. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 .By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. this option will place the link at a predefined location. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. Manual . All three files now reside. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. and click Properties. and click OK. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. and open Common\c_Site. this system is not exposed to the user. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. click Save As. in the Model Linking folder that you created. click Training Files.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. This option is grayed out. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. select the three files. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. 5 On the File menu. 4 On the File menu. right-click.■ Auto .rvt. and save the file there.

click Import/Link ➤ Revit. expand Views (all). If you wish to do so. Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. you can go to the Settings menu. For Positioning. you do not need to change the project units to metric.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. Notice the blue detail lines. and make your changes. select Auto . 10 In the Project Browser.Origin to Origin. click Project Units. 13 Click Open. and double-click Level 1. 11 On the File menu. expand Floor Plans. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex.

The first click specifies the move start point.The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. Standard move commands work with linked building models. 15 On the Edit toolbar. click (Move). Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. The Move command requires two clicks. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. The second click specifies the move endpoint. 16 For the move start point. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. The linked model moves as one object. After you select it. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 . 17 For the move endpoint.rvt displays in the Type Selector. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it.

For Positioning. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. 18 On the View menu. 21 Click Open. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu.Origin to Origin. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . select Auto .After you specify the location to move to. and select c_Townhouse. click Import/Link ➤ Revit.

The townhouse building model displays above the site model. In this case. 23 On the Edit toolbar. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. and click to specify the end of the rotation. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 . the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. To rotate an object. click (Rotate). you first specify the rotation start point. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. when the vertical line displays. click to specify the rotation start point. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it.

778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. click (Move). 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint.

30 For the starting point. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. and the second click specifies the copy-to point. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. The first click specifies the start point.The townhouse is located within its required footprint. click (Copy). Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. The Copy command works much like the Move command.

click Rotate. 34 On the Options Bar. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. 35 In the Element Properties dialog.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. and click OK. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click . enter Townhouse A. 37 On the View toolbar. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. use the Move command to make any adjustments. 32 On the Edit menu. click (Default 3D View). under Identity data. for Name. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse.

you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. 2 On the SteeringWheels. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. In the next exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercise.38 On the File menu. you need this project file open and in this view. do so before continuing. click and hold Orbit. they were placed too low within the site topography. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. click (SteeringWheels). click Save. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . In this exercise. After linking the files. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. When you originally linked the files. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. In this exercise. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site.

When using the Align command. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. In this case. expand Elevations. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. you first select the plane you want to align to. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. In the steps that follow.rvt. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. 7 On the Tools toolbar. when it highlights. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. To do this. click (Align). 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. 3 In the Project Browser. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. and double-click South. and click to select it. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. Click the Revit Links tab. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. under Views (all). If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. and click OK. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. and then select the plane that you want to align. and click to select the line.

click Save. Both townhouses should be at the proper level. 12 On the View toolbar. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. 15 On the File menu. 9 In the Project Browser. 14 On the SteeringWheels. This would over-constrain the model. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. click (Default 3D View). (SteeringWheels). click 13 On the View toolbar. click and hold Orbit. double-click North. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 . under Elevations. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. 11 Return to the South elevation view.

NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. and the halftone settings for each linked project. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. click By Host View. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse.rvt. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Custom. you need this project file open and in this view. As you can see. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. scroll down and clear Levels. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. click OK. you can independently control the visibility settings. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. select <Custom>. 8 For Annotation Categories. 2 On the View menu. 4 Under Visibility. In this exercise. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click South. expand c_Townhouse. or Custom. 9 Under Visibility. By linked view. When you link a file. In the next exercise. detail level. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. If you have not completed the previous exercise. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. 10 Click OK. click the Revit Links tab.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. If the Basics page is set to Custom. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. do so before continuing. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. under Elevations.rvt. display settings.

24 Click OK. 20 For c_Townhouse.rvt. By default.rvt. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. click By Host View.rvt. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Revit Links tab. select Custom. and click OK. medium. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Revit Links tab. or fine. expand c_Townhouse. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. 16 Under Visibility. under Floor Plans. and then set the detail level to coarse. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 . 22 Click the Model Categories tab. double-click Level 1. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. Using the Custom option. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. 23 In the Model categories list. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. under Display Settings. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. select <Custom>. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. click Visibility/Graphics.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. 14 On the View menu. on the Basics tab. In this case. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. no detail level changes are required. By selecting custom under Model Categories. You can click the value for Detail Level. With linked files.

In this case. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. under Visibility. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. all new.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. 29 Click OK. 28 Select By linked view for View range. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. you manage the linked files. In the next exercise. click Save. In this case. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. In this exercise. existing. there are situations. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. 26 Under Display Settings. on a sloped site for instance. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select c_Townhouse. click OK. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. demolished. By default. you need this project file open and in this view. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings.rvt. However. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. With the Show All filter applied. phase. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. All other components are grayed out. click Custom for the Townhouse link. and phase filter of a specific link. 31 On the File menu. 25 On the Revit Links tab. this is preferable. In most cases. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. a connection to the linked project continues to exist.

7 Click OK. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. click the Revit tab. You learn more about this in the next lesson. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 6 At the confirmation prompt. In general. 3 Under Path Type. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. Notice the Loaded. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. do so before continuing. click Manage Links. The default path type is Relative. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. Locations Not Saved. click Yes. 4 Under Linked File. and Saved Path fields are read only. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project.rvt. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. They supply information regarding the links. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. In a shared coordinate environment. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. select c_Condo_Complex. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. 5 Click Unload. the link is maintained.

A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. In general. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. If you choose not to open that workset. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance.rvt. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. expand Revit Links. To do this. click Save As. However. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. 9 On the File menu. In these cases.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. click the arrow next to the Open button. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. and select Specify. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. and click Reload. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. 8 In the Project Browser. When you initially place the link. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. the link is not loaded. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. right-click c_Condo_Complex. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn.

Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. If you have not completed the previous lesson. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). In the next lesson. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. When you share coordinates between projects. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. you are establishing a shared origin point. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. The host file consists primarily of site components. do so before continuing. In this exercise. leave the project file open in its current view. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. and the resulting project files. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. In essence. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. and save it as an RVT file. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . When Revit project views are exported to DWG. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. When used in conjunction with model linking.10 In the Save As dialog. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. name the file Site_Project. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson.

and the resulting project files. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 2 On the Tools menu. click the Condo Complex. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . do so before continuing. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. open it before continuing. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. 3 In the drawing area. When you are working in the host project. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. If you have closed the project. As indicated in the Status Bar. click Open. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. In this case.rvt and click Open. Select Site_Project. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. If you have not completed the lesson. Linking Building Models on page 772.coordinates are used. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project.

click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. it is placed at a specific location. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. However. select Location 1. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. If you have not completed the exercise. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. but can have multiple additional locations. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. click to select it. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. Lot B. and Lot C. and click OK. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. On the Status Bar. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. These three locations can be named Lot A. do so before continuing. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. even though both models originate from one linked file. you need this project file open and in this view. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. this location is not saved outside of the host project. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. 5 On the Design Bar. In this exercise. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 .4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. when the edges highlight. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location.

4 Under Value. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click OK. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. 12 On the Options Bar. click Reconcile. under Instance Parameters. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. select Move instance to. . you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. This is a one-time operation. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. click . notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. 7 In the Rename dialog. After a link instance is assigned a shared location.2 On the Options Bar. enter Lot A for New. In the Choose Location dialog. click Not Shared for Shared Location. When constraining a link to a location. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click Rename. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Change. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. under Instance Parameters. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Not Shared for Shared Location. 9 In the Select Location dialog. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. and click OK. Record the current position as a location. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. and click OK. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates.

notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. a warning displays. enter Lot B for Name. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. you cannot redefine its location. This is a two-click process. Notice the OK button is still not active. Record current position as. 23 Click Save Locations. click OK. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. make sure Lot B is selected. When you relocate a project. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. select the second option. Save locations 21 On the File menu. 16 Click Change. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. The second click specifies the move endpoint. click OK. and click OK. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. and click OK. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. When you release the mouse button. Because Lot A is currently in use. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. select Save. By relocating a project. 19 In the Select Location dialog. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . the active location position is moved. 30 On the Tools menu. When you create a location. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. and then select the townhouse project. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files.Notice the OK button is not active. and click OK. or cancel the action. 26 Click OK. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. The first click specifies the move start point. click the Revit tab. and the left townhouse resides at that location. To explicitly save a location. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. click Manage Links. click Duplicate. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. ignore the warning.

and click OK. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. In this exercise. 36 On the File menu. you work in one of the linked projects. NOTE In the following exercise. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. 34 On the File menu.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. 33 On the Edit menu. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. select Save. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. click Save. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. click Close. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up.

It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. it is placed automatically within the host project. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 . 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. If you have not completed the exercises. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Also. In this exercise. When opening the linked file. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Open. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. The current active location is Lot A. In addition. Because this building model only has one named location. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. 2 On the File menu. Click Open. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. select Auto . double-click 1st Floor. click Import/Link ➤ Revit.rvt file. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project.By Shared Coordinates. under Floor Plans. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. if other models were linked into the same host. do so before continuing.rvt file. Select c_Condo_Complex. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. For Positioning.

796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you create a new location.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. In this exercise. click Duplicate. If you have not completed the exercises. select True North for Orientation. and click Make Current. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. click View Properties. and click OK. click Manage Place and Locations. click Manage Place and Locations. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. do so before continuing. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. enter Lot C. you manage the shared locations. under Graphics. In the host file. 7 Click OK. 3 In the Name dialog. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. click OK. 6 Select Lot B. you can select Lot C if necessary. In the next exercise. you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. orient a view to true north. and click OK. 6 In the Element Properties dialog.

you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. do so before continuing. You can save the file if you wish. In this exercise. On the Options Bar. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. If you have not completed the exercise. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. click Close. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin.rvt and click Open. click Open. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Select Site_Project. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. 10 On the File menu. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin.

click Schedule/Quantities. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. select Doors. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. and click OK. under Category. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click the Fields tab. 5 Under Available fields. and click Add.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Count.

clear Itemize every instance. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. and then click OK twice. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. You have completed this tutorial. under Other. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. 12 Select Grand totals. right-click Door Schedule. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . expand Schedules/Quantities. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. and click Properties. click Close. click Save. 13 On the File menu. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping.8 Click OK. 14 On the File menu. select Family and Type for Sort by. In this exercise. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

Modifying General System Options In this exercise. and set it as your default template.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. selection default options. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. click the Graphics tab. These settings control the graphics. 6 In the New Project dialog. click OK. click Browse. 803 . you modify the system environment. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. In the first lesson. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. 4 Under Colors. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. select Invert background color. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and your username when using worksets. journal cleanup options. and click OK. notification preferences.rte. which is independent of the project settings. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. under Template file. Finally. 8 In the New Project dialog. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. they are not saved to project files or template files. In the second lesson. you create an office template. 3 In the Options dialog. click Training Files. Notice that the drawing area is black.

Notice that the system settings apply to this project. 26 In the Options dialog. click the Graphics tab. and select the wall. When an error occurs. 15 Click OK. 19 On the Design Bar. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. click Modify. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. click No. For Selection color. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. select yellow. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. However. click the value for Selection color.10 In the Options dialog. 12 In the Color dialog. clear Invert background color.rvt. click Training Files. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and click OK. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. click the Graphics tab. click Modify. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. select red. 11 Under Colors. click Wall. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. and open Metric\m_Settings. 14 Under Notifications. select None. 13 Click the General tab. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. 18 On the Design Bar. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Tooltip assistance. select One hour. 22 When prompted to save changes. the elements causing the error display using this color.

such as in a large. 8 Click Cancel. notice the list of library names. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. However. click Browse. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. TIP To view a template. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). Specifying File Locations on page 805. 10 In the Places dialog. These files are used in the software support process. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . click the File Locations tab. If prompted. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. select Normal. Under Username. you specify default file locations. 2 In the Options dialog. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. For Tooltip assistance. including your default project template. This path is set automatically during the installation process. centralized. click Places. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. 7 In the Options dialog. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. 5 Under Default path for user files. do not save the changes. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. and click Browse to select a template. select your preferred Save reminder interval. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. and family libraries. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. Under Journal File Cleanup. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Open. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. under Default path for family template files. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. Your login name displays by default. you can start a new project with that template. 3 Under Default template file. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. select the folder to save your files to by default. family template files. 4 Click Cancel. click Browse.27 Click the General tab. click Browse.

11 In the Places dialog. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. and you can create new libraries. and change the name to My Library. and Import dialogs. or families. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. When you are opening. Save. under Libraries. and click Open. Load. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. In the following illustration. and select it as the library path. saving. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . templates. or loading a Revit Architecture file. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog.library names and path. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. and click the icon side of the field. click (Add Value).

9 In the text editor. specify the new location here. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. This path is determined during installation. 2 In the Options dialog. 3 Under Settings. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. click the My Library icon. and Import dialogs. and decal image files. 5 In the text editor. custom color files. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 28 Click OK. and click OK twice. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. click the Spelling tab. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 19 Click Cancel. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 24 Click 25 Click OK. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Load. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. If you work in a large office. 22 Click Places. click Edit. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. click My Library. 21 Click the File Locations tab. scroll down the list of building industry terms. Save. such as bump maps. click Edit. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. 23 Select My Library. view the current path. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 15 Under Library Name. If you want to relocate this path. enter sheetmtl-Cu.

you modify snap settings. As you zoom in and out within a view. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click Text. 12 On the Standard toolbar. 14 Click in the drawing area. click OK. 18 In the Options dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Modify. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click OK. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. If prompted. click default template. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. click Training Files. do not save the changes. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click OK. under Template file. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Edit. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 19 Under Settings. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. click Browse. you modify snap increments. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. You can turn snap settings on and off. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 20 Under Personal dictionary. click Restore Defaults. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU.rte. 23 In the Options dialog. 21 In the text editor. delete sheetmtl-CU. work with snapping turned off. click File menu ➤ Save. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click the Spelling tab.11 In the Options dialog. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 4 In the New Project dialog. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 22 In the text editor. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. In this exercise.

A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching.6 Under Dimension Snaps. For example. enter SM. While sketching. clear Chain. If it does not. use the wheel button on your mouse. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. click OK. and move the cursor to the right.. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. If you do not have a wheel button. and enter 500 . zoom out until it does so. TIP To zoom while sketching. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. 7 Under Object Snaps. 8 In the Snaps dialog. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. snapping reverts to the system default settings. 10 On the Options Bar. such as ZO to zoom out. click Wall. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design.

26 Proceed to the next lesson. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. and the wall edges. and delete the value 500 . Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. Notice that snapping is once again active. the midpoint. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. and specify the wall endpoint.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. and click Wall. click Modify. it will snap to the endpoints. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. and do not save the file. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. Modifying Project Settings on page 811. This is the increment that you added previously. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 24 Click OK. and move the cursor to the right. 18 Enter SM. If you move the cursor along the wall. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 21 Move the cursor downward.. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. Do not set the wall end point. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely.

You create and modify materials. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. lines. fill patterns. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. annotations. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. Finally. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. Using these options. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. In the steps that follow. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. and open Metric\m_Settings. Modifying Project Settings | 811 . you create a new material and apply it to a model element.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. When you apply a material to an element. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. and object styles. save the project file with a unique name.rvt. click Training Files. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. you render a region to observe the changes.

and double-click 02 Entry Level. In the Materials dialog.Fieldstone. read-only library for render appearances. The properties describe the color. and texture of the material. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. and click OK. However. for Class. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. scale. enter Masonry . 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. In the next exercise. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. and select Masonry . The Render Appearance Library is a local. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .Fieldstone material. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. select Stone.Fieldstone. this material provides a starting point for the new material. and click OK. When you change properties of a render appearance. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 6 Click Replace. 11 Click OK. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . 13 Select the lower exterior wall.Stone. 2 Scroll down the materials list. These details will display in rendered images. Masonry . Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. In the steps that follow. When a model element is loaded into a project. 9 Click Apply. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. and click (Element Properties). the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. 10 Click the Graphics tab. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. 3 Click (Duplicate).

click This is the material that you created. 24 In the Type Selector. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. 22 Select the left exterior wall. 20 In the Materials dialog. click in the Material field. 18 For Finish 1.Brick. 17 For Structure. 19 On the right side of the Material field. click Model Graphics Style. Fieldstone on CMU. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. and click OK. and click OK. 15 Click Duplicate. select Masonry . select the rear exterior wall. click Edit/New. and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. 21 Click OK three times. click Edit. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . 23 While pressing CTRL.14 In the Element Properties dialog. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. 16 Enter the new wall name. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. 25 On the View toolbar. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 26 On the View Control Bar. click (Default 3D View).Fieldstone. .Fieldstone. Creating and Applying Materials | 813 .

32 In the Rendering dialog. 31 In the Rendering dialog. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. select the render region (a red rectangle). 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. The rendering process begins. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. under Quality. When finished. click Render. right-click the Design Bar. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. for Setting. click Rendering Dialog.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. In the following exercise. select Region. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. 28 In the Rendering dialog. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. select Low or Medium. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. and click Rendering. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. 29 In the 3D view.

Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. Drafting pattern density is fixed. and clear Region. m_Settings-in progress. expand Elevations. in the Rendering dialog. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. select Custom. 7 Under Custom. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.rvt.rvt. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. such as steel. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. and double-click West. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . Then click Render again. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. 3 Under Pattern Type. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. 33 In the Rendering dialog. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. choose Model. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. Zoom into the model. click Show the model. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. click Import. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. click Show the model. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. 5 Click New.

click Edit/New. enter . 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. In the Materials dialog. click OK. select Model. click 15 For Structure. 23 On the Design Bar. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. enter Fieldstone. and click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. click in the Material field. 22 Click OK three times. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. for Finish 1.pat. 18 Under Surface Pattern. click Edit. and click OK.Fieldstone. (Element Properties). click to select a fill pattern. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 10 For Name. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog.56. Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 17 On the right side of the Materials field. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Modify. click . 11 Click OK. 21 In the Materials dialog. 9 Under Custom. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. click Training Files. and for Import scale. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 14 In the Element Properties dialog.Fieldstone material. under Pattern Type. select fldstn.

use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. m_Settings-in progress. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. TIP If the pattern does not display. For example. there are often multiple window types within a project. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. and double-click 3 Windows.25 On the View toolbar. Controlling Object Styles on page 817. you can set the window frame material to By Category. 2 On the keyboard. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. expand 3D Views. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . click (Default 3D View). Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types.rvt. adjust your zoom settings as needed.

10 Select the arched window. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 In the Materials dialog. 8 In the Materials dialog. click Modify. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click By Category (located under the materials list). and click . under Materials and Finishes. 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. click in the Value column. and click 15 Click OK twice. click Edit/New. . 5 On the Options Bar. click in the Value column. for Trim Exterior Material.3 On the View Control Bar. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 Click OK twice. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. under Materials and Finishes. click (Element Properties). for Trim Exterior Material. 16 On the Design Bar. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 11 On the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). click Edit/New. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click By Category.

21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. click in the Material column. or keywords include the word red. 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. 29 In the Materials dialog. type red. click OK. and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. descriptions. and click OK. enter Trim . select Use Render Appearance for Shading. select Paint. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. When you render a 3D view. Controlling Object Styles | 819 . 25 In the search field. select Trim. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. 28 Under Shading. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. for Name.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 18 On the Model Objects tab. (Duplicate). 19 For Trim. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. 23 Click Replace. expand Windows.red paint. and click OK. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. click OK. . and select Trim. for Class. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab.

rvt. is open with the 3D view active. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 7 On the View Control Bar. (Default 3D view). 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. Use object styles to apply the change to all views. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820.rvt. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. select Red. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. select Roofs. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. enter Roof Line. 11 For Line Pattern. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. m_Settings-in progress. for Name. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 10 For Line Color. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. under Category. click New. select Roof Line. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . m_Settings-in progress. Now that you have created a line pattern.31 On the View toolbar.

but not the line pattern.12 Click OK. and verify that Hidden Line is selected. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 . double-click to Building. The line style is applied to the roof in the view. 14 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. click Model Graphics Style. 13 In the Project Browser. Notice that the line color displays in this view.

For Color. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. for Visibility. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. select Roofs. elevations. under Category. sections. 20 Click OK. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. under Floor Plans. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Roof Line. For Pattern. double-click 03 Roof. 18 For Line Color. 19 For Line Pattern. select Black. click Override. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. select Roofs. 22 On the Model Categories tab. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 15 In the Project Browser. select Solid. Plans. select Blue. select 5. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

Click Click (Draw). 30 For the Zoning Setback category. select Double dash. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. 31 Click OK. 29 For Name. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. (Line). ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . Notice the site topography and the property lines. select Level: 02 Entry Level. enter Zoning Setback. specify the following: ■ For Plane. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 33 In the Type Selector. and click OK. For Line Color.25 Click OK twice. select Red. click New. For Line Pattern. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. This places the line above the topography. double-click Site. under Modify Subcategories. select Zoning Setback. select 2. 28 In the Line Styles dialog. 34 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans.

824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 44 On the View toolbar. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 39 Click OK. and clear Property Lines. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. (Default 3D View). Expand Site. double-click 02 Entry Level. NOTE If Site is not selected. and clear Zoning Setback. and then clear Property Lines. 43 Click OK. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. 38 On the Model Categories tab.NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. select it. click (Default 3D View). 36 On the View toolbar. Modifying Annotations on page 825. expand Lines. under Floor Plans. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. 40 In the Project Browser. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. and clear Zoning Setback. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged.Imperial. 4 Enter the name Linear . click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. For Units. for Units Format.rvt. click the default value. 10 On the Standard toolbar. click another wall. under Floor Plans. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt.Imperial and click OK. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Duplicate. (Undo). 5 Under Text. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. and then click outside the second wall.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. select Feet and fractional inches. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. click one wall. select Linear . 7 Click OK twice. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. m_Settings-in progress. and place a dimension on the floor plan. click Modify. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. m_Settings-in progress. 9 In the Type Selector. You have created a new dimension style. To place a dimension. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. Modifying Annotations | 825 . click Dimension. double-click 02 Entry Level.

notice that the label displays 1i. 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 23 Click OK. Then press Delete. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. scroll down to Windows. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . In the preview image.Number as the assigned tag. Leave M_Window Tag .Number. In the steps that follow. 28 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Tags dialog. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. 16 Click Cancel. click M_Window Tag . and select the drop-down arrow that displays. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. click (Element Properties). select the 3 window tags. 24 While pressing CTRL. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag . The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. 19 Click Load. click the bottom window. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. click Tag All Not Tagged. 18 In the Tags dialog. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. click Training Files.Number. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. click Tag ➤ By Category.14 On the Options Bar. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. 26 On the Options Bar. under Category.Number is now the assigned tag. 22 Under Loaded Tags. clear Leader. 27 On the west wall.

select Openings. for Area. In the second section. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. the other displays the instance value. 31 On the Design Bar. 8 Under Walls. you specify the project units of measurements. select meters squared. for Length. 32 On the View toolbar. click Modify.rvt. In the final section. select 0 decimal places. Specifying Units of Measurement. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. Unless overridden. and Detail Level Options | 827 .Temporary Dimensions. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. you modify the detail level assignments. (Default 3D View). In the first section. verify that Create is clear. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. for Rounding. and Detail Level Options on page 827. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. you modify the temporary dimension settings. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. Specifying Units of Measurement. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. For Unit symbol. M_Window Tag . 2 In the Project Units dialog. 6 Click OK. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. dimension values display using this setting. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Specifying Units of Measurement. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. dimensions use these project settings.Temporary Dimensions. m_Settings-in progress. Temporary Dimensions. notice Window Tags appears twice. select To the nearest 100. and click OK. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. Click OK. select Faces. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. 9 Under Doors and Windows. Unless overridden. 4 In the Project Units dialog. 30 Under Leader. and click OK. 3 In the Format dialog. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.Number.Under Category. click the default value. and click OK. click the default value.

To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. expand Views (all). The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. In this exercise. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. click Training Files. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Floor Plans. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. In this table. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .In this project. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. and expand 3D Views. You do not select a view scale to move it. click . 14 Click File menu ➤ Close.rvt. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. In the left pane of the Open dialog. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. 12 Click OK.

8 Select Phase. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. and click OK. notice that views are grouped by phase. and click OK. In the Project Browser. select Type/Discipline. 2 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Views tab. expand each view type. 6 In the Project Browser. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg .Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. expand Sheets (all). Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 . 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. select Discipline.Phase 2-Structure West Wing .Phase 1-Structure East Wing .Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. 10 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. and click Apply. In the Project Browser.

and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. and click OK. 12 Click the Sheets tab. click the Folders tab.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. expand each sheet set. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. 16 Click the Views tab. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click OK. and click New. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. under Sheets. 14 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline.

levels. In the lesson that follows. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. When you create a new template based on an existing template. 2 Under Template file.rte template. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. Creating an Office Template on page 831.20 In the Browser Organization dialog. You can choose from several templates. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. Whenever you create a new project or template. the same rules apply. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. Creating an Office Template | 831 . In that case. and expand both Architectural and Structural. 21 In the Project Browser. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. You can also save these settings in a template file. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. navigate to your preferred directory. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. you select the starting point for your office template. dimensions styles. In this lesson. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. and open Metric\Templates. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. expand Complete. under Views. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. and Discipline. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. and view names. If you want to save this file. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. When you create new projects. click Training Files. For example. and click Open. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. click Browse. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. enter a unique file name. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. you create an office template. when you create a new project. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. and click OK. Proceed to the next lesson. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. View Type (Family and Type). expand 3D Views. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. and click OK.

6 Click OK. in the drawing area. select Project template. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. 9 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template.5 In the New Project dialog. and double-click North. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. 15 Under Create new. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. weights. for Create new. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. In this exercise. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 13 Select the default template. When you create the material. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. you can select it now. close them. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. drag a zoom region around the level heads. click Browse. For example. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 12 Under Template File. If you have additional projects open. select Project. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. you modify the project settings for your new template. 14 Click Open. If you want to use a template other than the default. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects.

and materials for model objects. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. including color. 9 Click OK when finished. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. You do this by defining the render appearance.During this exercise. If you change render appearance properties. For more information. texture. TIP For more information about creating new materials. line patterns. or refer to the online help. line colors. transparency. rotate. and move model patterns. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. see a preview of the rendered material. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. When you create or modify a material. the changes are saved as part of the project template. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. Modifying System Settings on page 803. create and modify them as needed. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. you can set line weights. For more details on modifying these settings. and similar attributes. In the Object Styles dialog. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. You can align. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. Observe the materials that are already defined. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. see the previous lesson. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. or modify existing patterns. 13 If necessary. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. and change render appearance properties. and imported objects. specific modifications are not dictated. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. annotation objects. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. 4 Click Replace. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. or refer to the online help. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. create new subcategories. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. and scroll through the list of categories. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. 2 Scroll down the materials list. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library.

The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. line color. 34 Click OK. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. 29 Click OK. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary.15 Modify categories. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. and create new subcategories as needed. and specify the properties. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. or line pattern as needed. 20 Click OK. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. modify the line weight. 19 If necessary. create new line subcategories. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. and click Edit. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. You can add and delete view scales. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 32 To modify a line pattern. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. such as section lines and dimension lines. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. tags. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. name the style. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. select it. To see the details of a particular style. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. select it from this list. 18 For existing line categories. click Duplicate. and dimensions.

and choose a decimal symbol. click Format. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. For example. 46 Click OK. 57 Specify the Slope option. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. angular. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. Volume. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. 53 For Length. 55 Click OK. TIP In the drawing area. and Angle settings. Linear. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. and click OK. 62 Click OK. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. name the style. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. and radial dimensions are modified separately. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. 60 Under Walls. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list.40 Click OK. 50 To load new annotation tags. In the Tags dialog. 61 Under Doors and Windows. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . click Load. 58 Click OK. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. when you add a door with the tag option selected. click Duplicate. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. and specify the properties. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. select it from this list. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. To see the details of a particular style. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular.

To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. 68 Delete. When you create a new view. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . If you routinely create the same documentation sets. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. 72 If necessary. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. or edit existing organization types. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. 71 Delete. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. 69 If necessary. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. click the arrows between columns. Each command is available on the Settings menu. Links to associated tutorials are provided. rename. Using the arrows between the columns. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. Use the table below as a checklist. click the Views tab. However. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. create new browser organization types. In a typical project. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. and move view scales as needed. The detail level is based on view scale. In such a case. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. 73 Click OK. Medium. or Fine. Although these settings can be saved within a template. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. rename. 70 Click the Sheets tab. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 64 Review the table. create new browser organization types. and make modifications in each area as necessary. 65 Click OK. To move the view scales. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. See Setting up If necessary. or edit existing organization types. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. For example. You can find additional information in Help.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level.

If this selection is satisfactory. title blocks. you may want to delete. you can set up the phases. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. notice the list of doors already loaded. you can move onto the next component type. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. you do both. In the steps that follow. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. the section cut material. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. In addition. For example. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. If necessary. and electrical fixtures. Depending on the intended use of this template. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Although this is possible. Although the options are endless. However. modify. phase filters. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. For example. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. or electrical fixtures. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. click Door. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. you could load detail components. If you have not completed the previous exercise. or add to this selection. You can load any family or group into a template. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. do so before starting this exercise. you can set the default contour line interval. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. there are some important thoughts to consider. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. and the poche depth. or use the Project Browser. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. 2 In the Type Selector. if you load every available window type. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . furniture.

create. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. Make modifications. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. expand Families. click Edit/New. In the Element Properties dialog.3 To modify. Modify type properties. Click Duplicate. or load a new door type. and click OK. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. or modify a door. and click Open. and click OK. click Load. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. and click OK. click Bar. Enter a name. click Edit/New. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. Notice that each family category is listed. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. Select it. In the Element Properties dialog. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . create.

15 Proceed to the next exercise. In addition. In this exercise. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. Discipline. To load a title block.) 10 Expand the title block. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded. Detail Level. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. you created new projects using different templates. To do so. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. you create the views required for your template. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. click Load. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. and select the title block type. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. 13 Click OK. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. (Element Properties). and click Delete. load. right-click the component. In addition. click 12 Click Preview. create. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . This title block is currently part of the template. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. 11 On the Options Bar. View Range.

Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. under Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. open the view from the Project Browser. the view is not linked to the template in any way. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. double-click Site. you can apply a view template to any view. and then click OK. select Architectural Plan. After applying the template. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template.settings of categories and subcategories. 18 If you modified any other view templates. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 15 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 4 If necessary. click Apply. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. you will first modify view templates. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. and click OK. In addition. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. under Elevations. double-click Level 2. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. Every time a new plan view is created. 11 Click Apply. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 12 In the Project Browser. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. click Apply. under Floor Plans. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. and apply the appropriate template. 2 Under Names. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. select Site Plan. At any time. double-click South. 6 Click OK. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. under Floor Plans. in the shortcut menu. If prompted. enter a view name. Blue level heads have associated plan views. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. By default. under 3D Views. To orient the 3D view to a direction. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. right-click the ViewCube. or an edge of the ViewCube. notice that you have the option to rename. select Make Plan View. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties.Notice the level names. click Level. ceiling plans. (Default 3D View). under Floor Plans. and. and elevations. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. duplicate. expand 3D Views. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. on the View toolbar. 31 Rename the 3D View. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. right-click {3D}. right-click the ViewCube. 20 In the Project Browser. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . right-click the ViewCube. 24 On the Options Bar. and click Properties. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. review the floor plans. click Orient to a Direction. and click Save View. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. or delete this view. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. and select the desired view. in the Project Browser. 22 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1. If you want to modify view properties. 30 In the Project Browser. click Orient to View. duplicate. right-click the view name. If it does not display. 23 To add more levels to the template. click Schedule/Quantities. click 29 In the Project Browser. a face. review the existing floor plans. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. Black level heads have no associated views. use the ViewCube. and select the desired direction. or delete them as needed. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. To orient the 3D view to another view. 21 In the Project Browser. Rename. and click Rename. 27 Create additional levels as needed.

and click OK. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. click Add View. 42 Create new sheets as needed. click Sheet. in the Project Browser. 37 Click OK. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. You are prompted to select a title block. select one. and click Add View to Sheet. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. Select a view. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. select the category type. modify settings as needed.txt for MicroStation). You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. You can still add views to the sheet. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. On the Appearance tab. select the title block and delete it. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. When you import a DWG or DXF file. select the default title block. 40 To add views to the sheet. select and order required fields. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. assign filters. and modify their properties accordingly. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. After the sheet is created. To later add a title block to a sheet. and click Rename.You can add schedules to a template. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. To do so. modify settings as needed. and click OK. On the Formatting tab.txt for AutoCAD. and click OK. modify settings as needed. On the Filter tab. Right-click the sheet name. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. on the View tab of the Design Bar. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. or exportlayersdgn. expand Sheets (all). 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog.

and click Save. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. and click Save. project parameters. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. doors. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. name the file. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . 9 Click Save As. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. For example. therefore. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. They cannot be shared with other projects. These settings are retained within the project template. When you create a multi-category schedule. and so on. name the file. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. and related multi-category tags and schedules. 5 For each category. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. name the file. When you import a DWG or DXF file. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. and click Save. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. click Save As. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. 8 In the dialog. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. and they become the set mappings for the project. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). Using shared parameters. When scheduling. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. and so on. windows. 2 For each category. for example.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. select Save As. You can save these mappings to a text file. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1.

If a file already exists. 24 To add a shared project parameter. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. 21 Under Categories. 23 Add project parameters as needed. select a parameter value type. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. 8 Under Parameters. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. 18 Under Type of Parameter. 10 Click OK. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. 14 Click Add. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. you can create a list of parameters. 3 Name and save the file. for Name. 9 Name the parameter. under Groups. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select the element categories to which this parameter applies.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. 2 Click Create. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. and select Shared Parameter. enter a parameter name. 25 Click Select. select Project parameter. select a group to add parameters to. 19 Under Group parameter under. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. click Add. 26 Click OK. and click OK. 22 Click OK. because each office has a unique set of needs. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. For each parameter group. add required parameters. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. select a parameter discipline type. and choose a shared parameter. click New. 17 Under Discipline. click New. and specify its discipline and type. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. If this template will be used by multiple team members. 6 Create as many groups as needed. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. 5 Enter the group name. project parameters. 16 Under Parameter Data. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 11 For each parameter group. you may want to save the file to a network location.

you create named print settings. 5 Click Save As. 34 For Category. By creating named settings within the template.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. 32 Navigate to the directory. and make it your default template file. click Setup. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. By going first to the Print command. Click OK. For each printer. you need only select a setting. paper placement. 2 Under Printer. save the file as a template. 6 In the New dialog. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. 28 Click OK. make minor modifications if necessary. for Name. you can set options such as sheet sizes. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. click OK. and click Open. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. and print. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. 3 Under Settings. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. The tag is now part of the template. and click OK. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. 37 When you have completed the schedule. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. 4 Modify the printer settings. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. select Multi-Category. enter a name for the schedule. you can load them into the template. 35 For Name. or refer to the online help. select the tag. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. In this exercise. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. and the percent of actual size. For information on creating multi-category tags. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields.

If you need to share this file with others. 11 Click Close when finished. select it. and saved them to a template. 9 In the Print dialog.rte). If you have a project. TIP There are other ways you can create a template.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. By investing the time to individualize your template. click Setup. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. 20 Click OK. you modified settings. 15 Name the template. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. and create new settings for this printer. loaded components. 18 Click Browse. Create additional settings as needed. This can provide a good starting point for a template. enter a new name for the printer. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. 19 Select the template. and click Open. save it in a network location. In addition. and click Open. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. 24 Navigate to the template location. click Save as. In addition. and click OK. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. In this lesson. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Template Files (*. modify the printer settings. and click Save. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. Your template is complete. The only remaining task is to save it. select a different printer. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. You can also set this template as your default template. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. 23 For Default template file. 22 Click the File Locations tab. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. you ensure that office standards are maintained. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. 14 Under Save as type. click Browse. 25 Click OK.